Home

R&S®FSW-K192/-K193 Docsis 3.1 User Manual

1. n INPut EATT STATe INPut EIETer ACEHannels S TATO6 rcnt peccet d dead INPut FIETer EIPASS STATO iiri caet tt in eee rax eo Pea eeu pet ere Pee RU EE TATE JE e INPut GAIN EVALUS serene croceo era re e rtr ve rea m HIN UTE IOC ANC ttn nente gen INPut IQ FUEEscalezAUTO ra vete eec riego zs INS Tr ment CREate DUPLicate tuerit INSTrument CREalte REPLACO erem tre Destin pa eee dde gu ge ce tace ashes INSTr ment CREate NEW tr rtr rh reb ker er Rea ee PC Rd BIsiH c
2. 148 INSTrument SELect LAY QUAD D EWINDOW 0os 216 EAYout CATalogEWINDOWJT rnnt i e 218 LAY outs 218 EAYout REMove WINDOW 218 LAY OutREPLACEe WINDOW 219 PEAY OUT SUNS iota e 219 gt 221 MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe MMEMOFY STORESSA IO STAT e 258 MMEMory STOResns TRACE miosina nr rrt regt hn ner e d eT IE eH 264 e lUapuaizuiddiCe e 192 o UT UNS ORCC 192 OUTPut TRIGgersport DIRGCIOR tero eere ren et t rte reete nns 206 OUTPUEMRIGGErS md ET 206 OUTPut TRIGgersports OTYBOQ rtp tree pec er retten tp 207 OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate etr tenerent teen rere 207 OUTPut TRIGgersports PULSS LENG uscire ero edo uer 207 READ PME TES pr Zapas N 184 SENSe TRAGCKing icr dr core
3. 229 lt gt lt gt 229 9 lt gt lt gt 230 lt gt lt gt 0 230 lt gt lt gt 231 231 P 231 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO State This command activates or deactivates automatic scaling of the y axis for the specified trace display If enabled the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application automatically scales the y axis to best fit the measurement results If disabled the y axis is scaled according to the specified minimum maximum values see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum and number of divisions see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe DIVisions Configuring the Result Display Parameters lt State gt OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on R
4. 270 e Controlling the Positive Transition 22 270 10 11 2 1 General Status Register Commands STATUSSPISESUIS ton 268 STATus CUEU NEXTIS 268 STATus PRESet This command resets the edge detectors and ENAB1e parts of all registers to a defined value All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh i e all transitions from O to 1 are detected All NTRansition parts are set to 0 i e a transition from 1 to 0 in a CONDition bit is not detected The ENAB1e part of the STATus OPERation and STATus QUEStionable registers are set to 0 i e all events in these registers are not passed on Usage Event STATus QUEue NEXT This command queries the most recent error queue entry and deletes it Positive error numbers indicate device specific errors negative error numbers are error messages defined by SCPI If the error queue is empty the error number 0 No error is returned Usage Query only 10 11 2 2 10 11 2 3 10 11 2 4 Status Registers Reading Out the EVENt Part STATus OPERation EVENt STATus QUEStionable EVENt STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the EVENt section of the status register The command also deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String contai
5. aiaia oni aaiae 197 NPE EAT TES 197 INPUL GAINEVALWe 197 iere Ie eR REO NDA NR ERR Re 198 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer Unit This command selects the unit of the y axis The unit applies to all power based measurement windows regardless of the n suf fix Parameters Unit DBM DBMV DBUV RST dBm Example CALC UNIT POW DBM Sets the power unit to dBm Manual operation See Unit on page 90 CONFigure POWer EXPected RF Value This command specifies the mean power level of the source signal as supplied to the instrument s RF input This value is overwritten if Auto Level mode is turned on Parameters Value Default unit DBM DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 89 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Offset This command defines a reference level offset for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Offset gt Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS
6. 48 e Frequency Sweep 119 Multiple Measurement Channels Sequencer Function When you activate an application a new measurement channel is created which deter mines the measurement settings for that application These settings include the input source the type of data to be processed I Q or RF data frequency and level settings measurement functions etc If you want to perform the same measurement but with dif ferent center frequencies for instance or process the same input data with different measurement functions there are two ways to do so Change the settings in the measurement channel for each measurement scenario In this case the results of each measurement are updated each time you change the settings and you cannot compare them or analyze them together without stor ing them on an external medium e Activate a new measurement channel for the same application In the latter case the two measurement scenarios with their different settings are displayed simultaneously in separate tabs and you can switch between the tabs to compare the results For example you can activate one DOCSIS 3 1 measurement channel to perform a DOCSIS 3 1 modulation accuracy measurement and a second channel to per form an OBW measurement using the same DOCSIS 3 1 input source Then you can monitor all results at the same time in the MultiView
7. 248 lt gt 11 4 5 2 250 lt gt 11 4 5 249 lt gt 11 4 5 250 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit SUMMary FERRor AVERage lt gt 11 4 5 5 lt gt 11 4 5 249 lt gt 11 4 5 5 250 lt gt 11 4 5 2 249 lt gt 11 4 5 1 250 lt gt 11 5 250 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF lt gt lt gt 5 251 lt gt lt gt 150
8. 251 e Retrieving Trace Results ennt eee 253 e Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA lt gt 255 e Importing and Exporting Data and 258 Numeric Modulation Accuracy Results The following commands describe how to retrieve the numeric results from the stand ard DOCSIS 3 1 measurements The commands to retrieve results from frequency sweep measurements for DOCSIS 3 1 signals are described in chapter 10 9 2 Numeric Results for Frequency Sweep Measurements on page 251 e Frame Statistic 238 e Error Parameter and Detailed Signal Content 238 e Queryifig LIMIS eerte 248 e Limit Check 1 nennen nnne 250 Retrieving Results 10 9 1 1 Frame Statistic Results The following commands are required to determine the basis for statistical frame evalu ation see table 3 2 M 238 etr Pere 238 FETCh FRAMe COUNt This command returns the number of analyzed frames from the current capture buffer If multiple measurements are required beca
9. 5 About this 5 Documentation 6 Conventions Used the 7 Welcome to the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 applications 9 Starting the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 10 Understanding the Display Information eene nnn 10 Measurements and Result 13 DOCSIS 3 1 VQ 13 Frequency Sweep 27 31 DOCSIS 3 1 2 0222 31 DOCSIS 3 1 Downstream Signal Processing eene 31 DOCSIS 3 1 Upstream Signal Processing eene 37 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data
10. 248 5 lt gt 248 5 2 248 FETCH SUMMary ZEN MAXIMUM em rn dee Gee a ra 248 FETCh SUMMary ZBIT MINImUmY 248 FETCh BITStream ALL This command returns the decoded payload data stream for each detected codeword in the currently captured data as a comma separated list For each codeword the following information is displayed CW Index Object Modulation NoBits NoEntries Bits Note Whether the result display is shown in compact or extended mode is irrelevant for the query results However the results do depend on whether bit or byte format is selected see UNIT BITStream on page 231 For details see Bitstream downstream only on page 17 Return values CW Index integer 0 1535 nan Codeword index Not available nan for PLC pilots and excluded subcarriers Retrieving Results lt Object gt Information type nan Invalid data PLCD PLC Data NCPCWA NCPCWP NCP Codeword A P NCPC24 NCP CRC 24 NCPN NCP Null CWA CWP Codeword A P Modulation BPSK QPSK QAM16 64 QAM128 QAM256 512 QAM1024 QAM2048 QAM4096
11. freq interleaving logical subcarriers Restore codewords according to Next Analyze signal Codeword Pointers characteristics NCPs for each symbol Constellation summary Decode and i Bit error ecode an i i Frame Codeword Configuration L4 correct data in LEM Pond i codewords i i Bitstream Fig 4 1 Signal processing in the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application OFDM channel input The encoded data input from an OFDM channel is a time domain discrete complex valued signal which is sampled at a rate of 204 8 MSamples by the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application It is then analyzed according to the configured signal descrip tion In the first step the cyclic prefix and roll off period are removed While the cyclic prefix prevents intersymbol interference the roll off period determines how steep the spec trum rises and falls at its edges FFT The initial data captured by the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application consists of mea sured values over time In order to analyze the data for each OFDM symbol in the fre quency domain that is the data in each subcarrier an FFT must be performed on the captured data Depending on the specified FFT length which corresponds to the num ber of subcarriers an FFT is performed on either 4096 samples 4K mode or 8192 samples 8K mode of the channel input for each symbol User Man
12. P Parameters DOCSIS ISA Liceo 13 Frontend Inputsighial 6st rer tt Rire re mat kei nete er en 42 te EE 42 Payload Channel estimatlori toL ks 208 Peak list Evaluation metliOd ent orte 30 Performing DOCSIS 3 1 measurements 132 Phase drift Eee T 103 a 208 Power vs Carrier Result display 22 ys Carrier trace data eit tents 257 vs Symbol X Carrier markers D vs Symbol X Carrier Result display 23 vs Symbol X Carrier trace data 257 Power sensors Activating Deactivating 81 Average count eC oodd n xo Configuration softkey Continuous Value Update Duty cycle nee Gs External power trigger netter External trigger level Frequency eene Frequency Coupling Measurement time Number of readings Reference level D Reference level offset 2 4 44 24 iie Settings isl Trigger mode iet erect rte rin rne Uni PC Result display Trace dala Gils A laa
13. FORMat DATA INITiate lt n gt CONMeas INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous INITiatesn gt REF ROS rtr gt 5 5 234 lt gt 5 01 00 1 10000000 eene nennen ennt etn thts rentrer 235 INITiatesn gt SEQUENCERMODE egde r genae dtr cc doi de E uetus 235 234 INPu t AT Ten altiom succo recte rtp to rtp ciere aa sae tia cree cete dd 196 P 196 INPut AT Tenuation PROTection RESOE en or ttt reete rp ttt cerro tene Ro Rn A ET CR Las IER AER 172 EE INPUt DIQ RANGE gt a INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO INP DIOS cii eo Eee ee
14. e dob A AU e PO DANN T Tax 60 Delete AI Godewords 60 Auto Detection NCP Gontent trt rra rer ta hne aa bekennen aerae ee rand anna 60 c AN A P 60 CANCE rm 60 Codeword Index Continuous line number in configuration table Remote command CONFigure DS CHANnel FCONfig i COUNt on page 169 Profile One of the active profiles defined in the Profile List on page 62 which is assigned to the selected codeword For zero bit loaded codewords assign the profile Unused Remote command CONFigure DS CHANnel FCONfig i PROFile on page 170 DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy First Subcarrier Defines the first logical subcarrier to which the selected codeword is assigned Remote command CONFigure DS CHANnel FCONfig i SUBCarrier STARt on 170 Number of Subcarriers Defines the number of subcarriers to which the selected codeword is assigned Remote command CONFigure DS CHANnel FCONfig i SUBCarrier COUNt on page 170 First Symbol Defines the first symbol to which the selected codeword is assigned Remote command CONFigure DS CHANnel FCONfig i SYMBol STARt on page 171 Number of Symbols Defines the number of symbols to which the selected codeword is assigned Remote command CONFigure DS CHANnel FCONfig i SYMBol COUNt on page 171 Insert Codeword Inserts a new row in the table below the currently sel
15. ay 153 0 153 5 154 CONFigure DS CHANnSEPEGC NDGX aeuo rrr Eua rn exa eee 154 GONFigure DS CHANnsEPEC INDex AUTO 2 2 a rs esi aat men etae 154 5 155 CONFigure DS CHANnel SPECtrum FREQUenoy icut ec teret tete ra dana d ye ka dau ade 155 GONFIig re DS CHANrneETIDepth 2 2 22 22 122202 ze corre et at ke ek aa er ru umb 155 eres eir C UEEMM 155 CONFigure CHANnel CP lt CyclicPrefix gt downstream Defines the cyclic prefix which determines where the useful data starts and allows the application to detect delay spreads during transmission The longer the delay spread the longer the CP must be This command describes the parameters for downstream signals For upstream sig nals see CONFigure CHANnel CP on page 156 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Parameters lt CyclicPrefix gt AUTO The length is determined automatically by the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application and indicated in the dialog box after the next measurement 192 Useful symbol period starts after 192 samples or 0 9375us 5256 Useful symbol period s
16. Parameters Reference 1to4 Selects markers 1 to 4 as the reference Example CALC DELT3 MREF 2 Specifies that the values of delta marker 3 are relative to marker 2 Manual operation See Reference Marker on page 127 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe State This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker State on page 126 See Marker Type on page 127 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X lt Position gt This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See X value on page 126 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Analysis Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 127 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe lt State gt This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is cur rently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF R
17. 86 ESI 1E o IRE TTE 87 EE Mo EE 87 IF Video Output Defines the type of signal available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW IF The measured IF value is available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector Remote command OUTPut IF SOURce on page 192 IF Wide Out Frequency Defines or indicates the frequency at which the IF signal level is provided at the IF VIDEO DEMOD connector if IF Video Output is set to IF Note The IF output frequency of the IF WIDE OUTPUT connector cannot be defined manually but is determined automatically depending on the center frequency It is indi cated in this field when the IF WIDE OUTPUT connector is used For details on the used frequencies see the data sheet The IF WIDE OUTPUT connector is used automatically instead of the IF VIDEO DEMOD connector if the bandwidth extension hardware option R amp S FSW B160 U160 is activated i e for bandwidths 80 MHz Remote command OUTPut IF IFFRequency on page 192 DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 191 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT conne
18. 51 e Input Output and Frontend Settings 73 e 2 a eR ee 91 R amp S FSW K192 K193 Configuration e Data oci eee 98 e OWeep Settlngjs issue 101 e Parameter Estimation and Tracking ccccscesccceccceceeeceseecesesesaeaeseeasaaeasseeeess 102 bDemodulation downstreamonly inea nnn rne aa o n hl npn 103 Evaluation ange 105 e Gonfig ratloni 109 e Automati Sellll js eee 118 5 3 1 Configuration Overview Access all menus Throughout the measurement channel configuration an overview of the most important Overview currently defined settings is provided in the Overview 1 0GHz Capture Time 6 ms ns am Mode Input OFDM Spectrum Loc Frequency Sample Rate Neer Ref Level Source Analysis BW Cyclic Prefix CP Att Level Capture Time Roll off Preamp Offset No of Samples Signal Description Input Frontend Trigger Data Acquisition Estimation Tracking Demodulation Result Config Display Config Channel Est Cont Pilots Y Axis Phase Track Frame NCP Time Track Decoding CWs Select Measurement 7972791 1 Magnitude Capture 5 Fig 5 1 Documentation Overview for DO
19. CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfIgSIS SEL6Ct ttt rette i ti irn teer ee RR ERR EN 165 CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfIgSIS S TAT63 net ihrer ett qne eri sp ette retine 165 CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig i SUBCarrier INCRement sss 166 CONFigure DS CHANnelI PCONfig i SUBCarrier MODuUulation esee 166 CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt SUBCarrier SET CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt SUBCarrier STARt 5 lt gt 5 5 2 167 CONFigure DS CHANnselPEC CARRIGIS iiie three tene tr aia xxr teu 154 GONFigure DS CHANnsIPEG INDOex nnne ra t een t rer rennen hr ccr 154 GONFigure DS GHANnekPEG INDex AUTO ucro rotten inten emp rep err euge tu Yo eg 154 CONFigure DS CHANnselPEC MODUlatlori enr t rtr pert ei oni ir eed tens 155 CONFigure DS CHANnel SPECtrum FREQuency CONFigure DS GHANtriel IDE DUI sc asco Fg o denk sea SX CEA EIU CONFigure MEXC STATO eiii recette tege rtt OE dtp cde oH ved Ca vu GONFigure MEXG SUBCarrier COUNT nep rtt rri ir eee er pha e ee sire rese s C edziU zie Tig clue S CONFigure POWer EXPecIed RE rrr rere GO
20. lt gt 50 166 0 lt gt 0 167 0 lt gt 50 167 0 lt gt 50 167 CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt COUNt Queries the number of entries in the Modulation Subcarrier Assignment table for the selected profile Use the CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt SELect command to select pro file Suffix lt i gt 1 200 irrelevant Return values lt NoEntries gt Number of entries Range 0 to 200 Example CONF DS CHAN PCON COUN Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Usage Query only Manual operation See Set Index on page 63 CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt DELete This command deletes the currently selected profile Use the CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt SELect command to select pro file Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Suffix lt i gt 1 200 irrelevant Example CONF DS CHAN PCON2 DEL Usage Event
21. neci eI E 194 SENSe 3FREQUerncy OF FSet e ect fei aeons ee ti tell ete SENSe MObulation t eto td e c ue e evan SENSe OBJect SEL6CGLU nno rere rrr irn E EYE LEY ERE R aves EXER Cr Ve EFE ERR RES EE MEA YER SENSe PMETersp DC YCle VALUG ier terr rete te teneo re ree tU Ee toe Eee ERE Enea eder E SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle STATe SENSe PMETersp FREQUGeRCO rtr rer Rr entree ie ier hi e na E Enea ea ERN XR SENSe PMETersp FREQUuency LINK ttt rette hen rtr Cte gne t ere ends 185 SENSe PMETerep MTIMSO oes cct tok n SORS EE Ipod 186 5 lt gt 186 SENSe PMETersp MTIMe AVERage S TATe ertt tn ttr eene 187 SENSe H PMETersp ROEEset STATE noa t e etr n rash eed oni ux tinue 187 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger DTIMe SENSe PMETersp TRIGGger BOL DJOIL iuter rtr hr eee trennt Leno nte he re ined ra 189 SENSe PMETersp TiSIGOSr AN S Teresis u colore tri aie Pere 190 SENSe PMETersp TRIGger EEVel 1 ttr eet hh tnnc er seh rh nente nr exer nni EE 190 SENSe PMETersp TRIGger SLOBe
22. 000000000000000 0 248 FETCh SUMMary MERPIilot AVERage 2 222 dessa etit et een anta cung Rin 248 FETCh SUMManMERPIIGEMAXINIUII uro cnra ai t raa eene 248 5 2 1 nens 248 FEICh SUNMMary PERRGIEAVERaSe eia d ud tere e a 248 FETCh SUMMary PERRoEMAXImUtm ocio 122 E E CH anette 248 2 52 248 5 1 12 2 11 41 248 MAXIMUM 248 FETCh SUMMary POWerMIMNImUIIS 5 ete 248 5 1 1 1 4 1 1 248 FETCESUMMary TF Rame Lead aat redet tete ger Yee traite 248 FETCh SUMMary TFRame MINimuUtm aoi coo dua tcp ima pecori tae pe i dete hay ee 248 FETGH SUMMary TPLGCAVERaAge it ertet pe en EE Her eee RC 248 FETOh SUMMary TPEC MAR 248 2
23. 127 Norm Delta ic Outp ts 3 crt 84 Power Sensor io de cet RH Heec bud 96 Power Sensor Config 2 80 Preamp e 4 91 Ref bevel 89 Ref Level 89 Refresh 101 Repetition interval 96 Res l COMIG nct rtr eei tenen 109 RE Attem AUTO ie edo 90 RF Atten Manual 2 90 RF Power 2395 Sequencer 47 Signal Description 2 51 Single Sequehcer 47 Single SWEEP eere Sweep Config 3 TIME Trigger Config 2 MMNIQGERONMSSU tree erento Span MEMU PER Specifics for Config ratiOri rione ee er ter retra eed Spectrum Flatness Parameters Result display Trace data Statisti COUNT c aano M ERN Statistics 14 Programiming example rnnt 271 Status registers 267 DOCSIS 3 1 267 Querying 267 268 STATQUES POW 172 STATus QUEStionable SYNC 267 Stream Directo M 52 66 Subcarriers Excluded downstream Excluded upstream ete
24. ted Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it Example INST DEL IQAnalyzer4 Deletes the channel with the name IQAnalyzer4 Usage Event Activating DOCSIS 3 1 Measurements INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing measurement channels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels Return values lt ChannelType gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see tables below Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command Example INST LIST Result for 3 measurement channels ADEM Analog Demod IQ IQ Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer2 Usage Query only Table 10 3 Available measurement channel types and default channel names in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Application lt ChannelType gt Default Channel Parameter Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer Pulse R amp S FSW K6 PULSE Pulse Analog Demodulation R amp S FSW K7 ADEM Analog Demod GSM R amp S FSW K10 GSM GSM Multi Carrier Group Delay R amp S FSW K17 MCGD MC Group Delay Amplifier Measurements R amp S FSW K18 AMPLifier Amplifier Noise R amp S FSW
25. 30 Diagram Displays a basic level vs frequency or level vs time diagram of the measured data to evaluate the results graphically This is the default evaluation method Which data is displayed in the diagram depends on the Trace settings Scaling for the y axis can be configured Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH DIAG see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 216 Result Summary Result summaries provide the results of specific measurement functions in a table for numerical evaluation The contents of the result summary vary depending on the selected measurement function See the description of the individual measurement functions for details SS PE ee el User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 29 R amp S9FSW K192 K193 2 Result Summary Channel Bandwidth Offset Power R 1 229 MHz 0 86 dBm 0 86 dBm ower 79 59 dB Measurements and Result Display eee EE Jpper 80 34 dB 85 04 dB 83 85 dB Tip To navigate within long result summary tables simply scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RSUM See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 216 Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers For 3 dimensional result displays MER vs Symbol X Carrier Power vs Symbol X Car rier the value of a marker consists of the carrier x the symbol y and the parameter value
26. e 208 iz Iu edBIzm 209 STAT s OPERalion CONDIIOIY ccrto rrt EI e RO ERES PERPE YU da 269 STATus OPERation ENABle STATuS OPERationsNT RAD SIBOD ccc tuut ua roo 270 STATus OPERatior PTRADSIUORD ed E tpe o teg c eec e cd capta aad 270 STAT Ss OPERaltion EVENtI n rien reperi o rrr Ye REO 269 STATUSIPIRESOLD 268 STATus QUEStionable CONDIIOB teret daia beate epa d ee de eed 269 S TAT s QUEStonable ENABIG 3 tet Ebert e core cosctetur rU STATus QUEStionable NTRansition STATus QUEStionable PTRansition STAT s QUEStionable S YNG GONDILIOFI 2 2 irruere era ce taa deae ea t rec ipt Nr d tu ed 269 STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle eese 269 STATus QUEStionable SYNG NTRarsitiOn tnnt tr rnt rrr tert ner Eon 270 STATus QUEStionable S YNC P TRansitloh 1 rrr nona enean tbt enn erret ir ree 270 STATu s QUEStionable SYNGO EMENIJ toon orto rne trt tr RE E n HE ER INE HRK DR REN dE usenet 269 STATus QUEStionable EMENIT rntt noe Ch tpe trac ec e o hg n PR pc iet 269 STAT s QUEUSENEXT 2 es coire re rite etx ads cope an rhe s o or ERE GA 268 exYSTem cOMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNIS rte nt ror osr ar
27. 000000 162 0 lt gt 50 1 163 5 lt gt 5 163 0 lt gt 50 163 CONFigure DS CHANnel CPES lt i gt COUNt Queries the number of entries in the Continuous Pilots and Excluded Subcarrier Assignment table Suffix lt i gt 1 200 irrelevant Return values lt Entries gt integer Range 1 to 200 Example CONF DS CHAN CPES COUN Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Usage Query only Manual operation See Set Index on page 56 CONFigure DS CHANnel CPES lt i gt SUBCarrier INCRement lt Increment gt Defines the increment for a series of subcarriers to be configured identically in the Continuous Pilots and Excluded Subcarrier Assignment table Suffix lt i gt 1 200 index in the Continuous Pilots and Excluded Subcarrier Assign ment table Parameters lt Increment gt Range 1 to 2K mode 4095 4K mode 8191 Example CONF DS CHAN CPES2 SUBC INCR 10 Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Configuring th
28. 124 e Zoom FUNCIONS eec t ea Dd ect ae ue be ea eat Cea 128 Traces Access TRACE gt Trace Config For measurements in the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application the displayed traces are not configurable However the traces can be exported to an ASCII file For RF measurements see the R amp S FSW User Manual e Trace Data Export Conflgurattott rede iicet es eiae Melati 122 Trace Data Export Configuration Access Save Export Trace Export Config or TRACE gt Trace Config gt Trace Data Export The standard data management functions e g saving or loading instrument settings that are available for all R amp S FSW applications are not described here Traces Traces 4 Transient Analysis Traces Trace Data Export Export all Traces and Marker Table Results Indude Instrument Measurement Settings Decimal Separator Point Export to ASCII File Export all Traces and all Table Results eere nennt cre 123 Include Instrument Measurement Settings cemere 123 EX DOI M D E 123 Decimal Separator a PR RR eH nn Equi 123 Export Traces to 124 Export all Traces and all Table Results Selects all displayed traces and result tables e g Result Summary marker table etc in the current application for export to an ASCII file Alternatively you
29. 2222 02022 02 ee setsis sanae tee caen toad ege 25 Signal 25 Spectrum Elatless us icri bes Padus 26 Bitstream downstream only This result display shows the decoded data stream for each detected OFDM symbol in the currently Selected Frame as indicated in the Magnitude Capture display Which bits exactly are decoded is configurable for example the decoded payload data default the raw bits or the input or output bits of the parity check By default the byte values are displayed Alternatively the individual bit values can be displayed The bitstream can only be provided for downstream DOCSIS 3 1 signals The bitstream can be displayed in a compact or an expanded format In the compact format only the first max 25 bytes are displayed for each codeword so that one row per codeword is displayed in the table 4 Bitstream Index Object Modulation Bits Bits Info Bits Decoded Payload Data Compact Expanded 47 F8 DS EC AB B8 00 3D EC EDD BO SF Ai Ci C4 84 9B 1B 5A 5B DD D8 Fig 3 1 Bitstream result display for DOCSIS 3 1 standard compact display In expanded format all bytes for each codeword are displayed where each row dis plays a maximum of 20 bytes Thus multiple rows may be required for a single code word In this case the object for subsequent rows is indi
30. CF 500 MHz 20 MHz 5 204 8 2 The carrier values be provided as carrier numbers or carrier frequencies see Selected Frame Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH GDEL see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 216 Results SENSe FRAMe SELect on page 213 TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 253 Magnitude Capture The Magnitude Capture display shows the magnitude vs time data captured in the last measurement Green bars at the bottom of the Magnitude Capture display indicate the individual detected frames with their frame number The blue bar indicates the cur rently Selected Frame which is evaluated for graphical result displays A vertical blue line indicates the position of the PLC time stamp reference point down stream or the frame start upstream SS SSS a User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 19 R amp S FSW K192 K193 Measurements and Result Display umm umen E 1 Magnitude Capture 1 Clrw 8 0 ms Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 216 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 253 Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers For 3 dimensional result displays MER vs Symbol X Carrier Power vs Symbol X Car rier the value of a marker consists of the carrier x the symbol y and the parameter value z 5 Marker Table Whd Type Ref Tre X value Y value Z value 13 16 GHz 67 73 dB Carrier
31. EC 128 E 129 Ixestore Onginal DoR en o ce eo cu or 129 Deactivating Zoom Selection 44 0 0000 00 20000 entrent 129 Single Zoom Zoom Functions A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 265 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA on page 265 Multiple Zoom In multiple zoom mode you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corre sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 266 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00OM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA on page 266 Restore Original Display Restores the original display that is the originally calculated displays for the entire capture buffer and closes all zoom windows Remote command single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 265 multiple zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt
32. lt gt lt gt 5 2 150 lt gt gt sapinira Rd Lene EXER YR ER Een 261 CALGulates n gt MARKers M gt X ui concrete rh ri a e EE nr rt rar eR c EE ed XR AY KR FER ER 252 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y lt gt lt gt 261 e Ee rap iud 262 CALC latesn MARKer sm E M 261 lt gt lt gt 5 ee en npe 184 CALCulate n PMETer p RELative MAGNItude sese nennen 183 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO 183 GALGulate sn STATistics CODF STATe eorr 150 GALGulate n STATistics RESUlt E trt eer tne e ier d Pe o EC 252 e Bench suro 195 CALibration AlQ HATIMING S LATO gea vet tla eene eg Te e ads 180 GALibration PMETer p ZERO AUT O ONGE rr eoe re tener aha ea ie peor RR no anao 183 CONFigure CRANMEI 6 151 CONFigure CHANnel CP enero ttn rtr e
33. terere p e ie Ren Ed ma 61 e Profile Settings Modulation Subcarrier 63 Profile Management Access Overview Signal Description Profile Configuration or MEAS CONFIG gt Signal Description gt Profile Configuration A profile is a set of parameters that defines how information is transmitted from a CMTS to a cable modem or from a cable modem to a CMTS Up to 16 different profiles can be defined and assigned to a specific block of data Pro files that contain a configuration for at least one subcarrier are considered to be active indicated by black text Empty profiles are inactive indicated by gray text DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Signal Description OFDM Channel Description Profile Configuration Profile List Profile A Profile B Profile C Profile D Profile E Profile F Profile G Profile H Profile I Profile J Profile K Profile L Profile M Profile N Profile O Profile P Edit Profile Delete Profile Fig 5 5 Profile configuration for downstream DOCSIS 3 1 signals Prone deb ree eer reote e deve dv cabo dice ede ee ett enint e 62 22 TORRE 62 Delete dn OR De Sae Eye ru 63 Profile List Up to 16 different profiles can be defined and assigned to a specific set of subcarriers Profiles that contai
34. 249 lt gt 11 249 CALOCulate n LIMit SUMMary MERPilot MI Nimum 1 1 4 4 250 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit SUMMary CERRor AVERage CALCulate lt n gt LIMit SUMMary CERRor MAXimum This command queries the average or maximum sample symbol clock error limit for all frames as determined by the default DOCSIS 3 1 measurement E User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 248 Retrieving Results The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Return values lt Value gt Default unit ppm Example CALC LIM SUMM CERR MAX Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt LIMit SUMMary FERRor AVERage CALCulate lt n gt LIMit SUMMary FERRor MAXimum This command queries the average or maximum center frequency error limit for all frames as determined by the default DOCSIS 3 1 measurement The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Return values lt Value gt Default unit Hz Example CALC LIM SUMM FERR MAX Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt LIMit SUMMary MER MINimum This command queries the minimum modulation error ratio MER limit for all data pilot carriers as determined by the default DOCSIS 3 1 measurement The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Return values lt Value gt Default unit dB Example CALC LIM SUMM MER MIN Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Me
35. 8192 QAM16384 NONE MIXED Modulation see Modulation on page 63 lt NoBits gt Total number of bits in object lt NoEntries gt Number of decoded payload bits For byte format see UNIT BITSt ream lt NoEntries gt lt NoBits gt 8 For bit format lt NoEntries gt lt NoBits gt lt Bits gt Decoded payload bits in hexadecimal format Example UNIT BITS BYTE FETC BITS ALL Result in byte format nan PLCD QAM16 2880 360 1F 35 B0 FF B3 58 78 63 47 F8 0 NCPCWC QAM16 24 3 20 00 00 1 NCPCWC QAM16 24 3 20 06 54 2 NCPCWA QAM16 24 3 01 0C A8 0 NCPC24 QAM16 24 3 A4 74 7D 0 CWC QAM1024 14232 1779 A0 01 C0 04 80 1B 00 5A 01 DC 1 CWC QAM1024 14232 1779 A0 01 C0 04 80 1B 00 5A 01 DC 2 CWA QAM64 14232 1779 80 01 00 06 00 14 00 78 01 10 3 NCPCWD QAM16 24 3 30 08 E9 4 NCPCWD QAM16 24 3 31 0E 2F 1 NCPC24 QAM16 24 3 7E E4 A4 3 CWD QAM4096 14232 1779 E0 00 40 01 80 05 00 1E 00 44 4 CWD QAM4096 14232 1779 E0 00 40 01 80 05 00 1E 00 44 5 NCPCWD QAM16 24 3 30 05 1D 6 NCPCWC QAM16 24 3 21 0A 63 2 NCPC24 QAM16 24 3 F3 28 22 5 CWD 4096 14232 1779 0 00 40 01 80 05 00 1 00 44 Usage Query only Manual operation See Bitstream downstream only on page 17 Retrieving Results Queries the automatically determined or specified cyclic prefix for the signal
36. If this value is not 0 Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application All results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application Parameters lt Offset gt Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 88 10 5 3 2 Amplitude Settings The following commands are required to configure the amplitude settings in a remote environment Useful commands for amplitude settings described elsewhere INPut COUPling on page 172 INPut IMPedance on page 174 Remote commands exclusive to amplitude settings cCALCulatesms UNIT POWT etia e tt ea sg ete 195 GCONFigure POWerEXPeclediRF 2 rir toe re ed aec eec er cedes 195 9 lt gt lt gt 195 lt gt lt gt 195 INPUDAT TONUA M 196 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy AUT 196 196 05 rasa madden
37. Power vs Symbol X Carrier 257 Result summary 2 255 Retrieving remote 287 RF remote we 251 Spectrum Flatness wn 200 Trace remote 4 2583 Trace data query 255 Updating the display sinisisi 101 Retrieving Numeric results remote 237 Results remote 2237 RF Results remote 251 Trace results remote esses 253 RF attenuation PM 90 MIENTO 90 74 Overload protection ertet tene 42 Overload protection remote 172 REMOTE ME PR 172 174 RF measurements Analysis adr rr ertet ana Configuration remote Results remota neret Step tps RF Power Mere Trigger level remote Rising Slope POWe r Sensor HL ttes 84 RUN CONT KOY 101 RUN SINGLE cog M 101 S Sample rate Digital Digital 1 remote Scaling 8X S xen coe e Deas bts ce Pace 117 SEM Programming example 5 275 SEQUENCER Aborting remote Activating remote MOUE
38. Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HYSTeresis page 190 Trigger Holdoff Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command SENSe PHETer p TRIGger HOLDoff on page 189 Drop Out Time Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Slope Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger SLOPe on page 190 Output Settings Access INPUT OUTPUT gt Output The R amp S FSW can provide output to special connectors for other devices For details on connectors refer to the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy How to provide trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual HAUT Output IF Wide Out Frequency Noise Source Trigger 2 Trigger 3 lade ox E 85 Wide d roro m 85 Noise SOLIFGB cro RUNE 86 NGG GCE M 86 res 86
39. ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 266 for each multiple zoom window Deactivating Zoom Selection mode Deactivates any zoom mode Tapping the screen no longer invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 265 multiple zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 266 for each multiple zoom window o9 Import Export Functions Q Data Import and Export Baseband signals mostly occur as so called complex baseband signals i e a signal representation that consists of two channels the in phase 1 and the quadrature channel Such signals are referred to as I Q signals The complete modulation informa tion and even distortion that originates from the RF IF or baseband domains can be analyzed in the baseband Importing and exporting I Q signals is useful for various applications Generating and saving signals in an RF or baseband signal generator or in external software tools to analyze them with the R amp S FSW later e Capturing and saving signals with an RF or baseband signal analyzer to ana lyze them with the R amp S FSW or an external software tool later For example you can capture data using the Analyzer application if available and then analyze that data later using the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application As opposed to storing trace data which may be averag
40. e DOCSIS 3 1 Chatacterislis erento ctn irc trea tek gian ce ebd 31 DOCSIS 3 1 Downstream Signal 31 e DOCSIS 3 1 Upstream Signal Processing i rz ez aed 37 e Receiving Data Input and Providing Data 42 e Preparing the R amp S FSW for the Expected Input Signal Frontend Parameters 44 DOCSIS 3 1 Characteristics A cable network based on the Data Over Cable Service Interface Specifications DOCSIS 3 1 see References allows for very high data rates due to its large number of carriers and very high modulation rates For downstream transmission based on DOCSIS 3 1 OFDM channels with a band width of up to 192 MHz are used in a spectrum from 258 MHz to 1 2 GHz Each OFDM channel in turn consists of 7600 active subcarriers with a spacing of 25 kHz or 3800 active subcarriers with a spacing of 50 kHz Data is transmitted with a fixed sample rate of 204 8 MHz For upstream transmission based on DOCSIS 3 1 OFDM channels with a bandwidth of up to 96 MHz are used in a spectrum from 5 MHz to 204 MHz Each OFDM channel in turn consists of 3800 active subcarriers with a spacing of 25 KHz or 1900 active subcarriers with a spacing of 50 kHz Data is transmitted with a fixed sample rate of 102 4 MHz OFDM channels can be configured independantly taking different channel conditions into account Each subcarr
41. 160 Samples Useful symbol period starts after 160 samples or 1 5625 us 1 5625ys 192 Samples Useful symbol period starts after 192 samples or 1 875us 1 875ys 224 Samples 2 1875ys 256 Samples 2 5ys 288 Samples 2 8125ys 320 Samples 3 125ys 384 Samples 3 7 5ys 512 Samples 5 0ys 640 Samples 6 25us DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Useful symbol period starts after 224 samples or 2 1875 us Useful symbol period starts after 256 samples 2 55 Useful symbol period starts after 288 samples or 2 8125 us Useful symbol period starts after 320 samples or 3 125 us Useful symbol period starts after 384 samples or 3 75 us Useful symbol period starts after 512 samples or 5 0us Useful symbol period starts after 640 samples or 6 25 us Remote command CONFigure CHANnel CP on page 156 FETCh CP on page 241 Roll off Defines the roll off period for the Tukey raised cosine window which is applied at the beginning and end of an OFDM symbol The roll off period defines the steepness of the filter The required period depends on the current transmission conditions The roll off period be between 0 us and 2 1875 us for the upstream Note The roll off period is integrated in the Cyclic Prefix CP and must be shorter than the Cyclic Prefix CP Auto Max Roll Off 0 Samples 0 0 us 32 Samples 0 3125ys 64 Samples 0 625 96 Samples 0
42. gt 2 22 168 05 lt gt 4 7 1012 00 169 CONFigure US CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt MINislot COUNt lt NoSlots gt Defines the number of minislots for which the specified configuration applies Suffix lt i gt 1 200 index in the Profile Configuration Upstream table Parameters lt NoSlots gt Number of minislots Range 1 to 237 RST 10 Example CONF US CHAN PCON2 MIN COUN 4 Manual operation See Number of Minislots on page 73 CONFigure US CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt MINislot MODulation ModType US Defines the modulation used by the specified subcarriers Suffix lt gt 1 200 index the Profile Configuration Upstream table 10 5 1 6 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 11 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Parameters lt ModType_US gt ZEROVAL BPSK QPSK QAM8 QAM16 QAM32 QAM64 QAM128 QAM256 512 1024 QAM2048 QAM4096 Example US CHAN PCON MIN MOD QAM16 Manual operation See Minislot Modulation on page 72 CONFigure US CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt MINislot PPATtern lt PilotPattern gt Defines the pilot pattern used by the specified minislots Which patterns are available depends on the FFT mode For more information see Pilot pa
43. lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP FILT HPAS ON Turns on the filter Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz on page 75 INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This command turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Prese lector on page 76 Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 0 for Analyzer GSM VSA Pulse Amplifier Transient Analysis DOCSIS and MC Group Delay measurements Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 76 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input impedance of the RF input In some applica tions only 50 O are supported 75 should be selected if the 50 input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a matching pad of the RAZ type 25 in series to the input impedance of the instrument The power loss correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 500 75 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Impedance on page 75 See Unit on page 90 INPut SELect lt Source gt This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to input data
44. parameter XML file The XML elements and attrib utes are explained in the following sections Sample parameter XML file xyz xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt xml stylesheet type text xsl href open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt RS IQ FileFormat fileFormatVersion 1 xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation RsIqTar xsd xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance lt Name gt FSV K10 lt Name gt lt Comment gt Here is a comment lt Comment gt lt DateTime gt 2011 01 24T14 02 49 lt DateTime gt lt Samples gt 68751 lt Samples gt lt Clock unit Hz gt 6 5e 006 lt Clock gt lt Format gt complex lt Format gt lt DataType gt float32 lt DataType gt lt ScalingFactor unit V gt 1 lt ScalingFactor gt lt NumberOfChannels gt 1 lt NumberOfChannels gt DataFilename xyz complex float32 DataFilename lt UserData gt lt UserDefinedElement gt Example lt UserDefinedElement gt lt UserData gt lt PreviewData gt lt PreviewData gt lt RS_IQ TAR FileFormat gt Data File Format iq tar Element Description RS IQ TAR File Format The root element of the XML file It must contain the attribute ileFormatVersion that contains the number of the file format definition Currently fileFormatVersion 2 is used Name Optional describes the device or application that created the file Comment Optional contains text that fu
45. 248 FETCRh SUMMaty POWerMAXImURIm T rtp tr trn er eene rrt 248 FETCh SUMMary POWerMINimbUtmm nce osten icr Rer LER RR ERR PER Rae 248 FETGh SUMMary POWer AVERAdge occae SEE IIR XX SE POR E CHE IMMER USE 248 FETCh SUMMary TFRame MAXImUlTI cs iter te rrt tn n eh ri nere rn n en de een 248 FETCh SUMMary TFRame MINimmutm inci irre ert eee tra EN EY Rd ERR 248 FETCh SUMMary TFRame AVERage 248 FETCh SUMMarty LPEC MAXIUR is eer rper aa nee A E nns 248 50 trt nre nar irent rhe Ee ene EE 248 etre rta eran Y Reese pergere e Fey uera yore 248 FETCRh SUMMaty ZBIT MAXIImUET a tpe nna n RR Exe ER e XY ERE KENN 248 50 2 iecit er P Ea ERROR 248 FETON SUMMary ZBITEAVERAe l ccce ha tbt SE be xS EY ewe egi YT SE CHE EN Ee EFE Spe 248 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator oir npn eee rerit due FORMat DEXPON TRACES
46. 42 Preparing the R amp S FSW for the Expected Input Signal Frontend Parameters 44 Mone me 46 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function 46 Display Configutatlon ertet teint 47 DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation 48 Frequency Sweep 24 001 nnn 119 ILI eed 122 NWACCS t MY 122 MARK CRS ct E E A 124 FAo nignubepnle 128 Data Import and 4422 130 Import Export Functlons e reiten rnt binnen aote Pi ea RR YR RRR 130 How to Perform Measurements in the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 appli 132 User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 3 8 1 8 2 8 3 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 10 11 10 12 1 2 How to Analyze Modulation Accuracy and Signal Contents for DOCSIS 3 1 Down stream Signals a E ie 132 How to Analyze Modulation Accuracy and Signal Contents for DOCSIS 3 1 Upstream Signals neret 134 How to Evaluate the OBW or CCDF for DOCSI
47. 94 Digital input Connection information rrt 77 Direct path Input configuration ertet 75 REMOTE TE 172 Display Configuration Softkey nsaria 47 Docsis Programming examples nee tnt 270 DOCSIS 3 1 Downstream measurements step by step 132 Upstream measurements step by step 134 DOCSIS 3 1 pde re E Frane 13 CI M IU 13 Drop out time 96 Trigger Power 2 84 Duplicating Measurement channel remote 145 Duty cycle POWCrSENSOM re acount 83 Electronic input attenuatior us coco ener doe 90 Enhanced mode Digital OR essi 94 Errors 89 Phase drift 103 208 ierit eerta ceci es 103 DS ERES 267 Evaluation MetliOdS 16 Evaluation methods Frequency sweep measurement 29 REMOTE uer 2106 Trace data ERE 255 Evaluation range aine T 211 Result displays s eret e 105 SeltiligSou ie nce irc pei cedem Peer 122 EVM OPUUMIZING ot e ert CA 208 Excluded subcarriers DOWMSUC EIN trn deae ati bu ns 55 WU PSMA 69 Exporting VQ dala teintes ds 73 130 131 280 data
48. EXPanded Manual operation See Bitstream Layout on page 114 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TABLe ITEM Item State DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TABLe ITEM Item This command specifies which parameters are displayed in the Result Summary dis play Note that all parameters are calculated regardless of their visibility Configuring the Result Display The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Suffix lt n gt 1 n Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Parameters for setting and query Item MER MERData MERPilot FERRor CERRor TPLC POWer ZBIT For details on the individual parameters and the assignment of the parameters to the keywords see table 3 1 Example DISP WIND TABL ITEM MERD ON Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 SENSe MODulation SELect Modulation Defines the modulation for which the Constellation diagram is displayed Return values Modulation ALL ZEROBIT BPSK QPSK QAM16 QAM64 QAM128 QAM256 512 QAM1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 Example MOD SEL QAM16 Manual operation See Constellation on page 18 See Modulation on page 112 SENSe OBJect SELect lt EvalRange gt Defines the objects for which the Constellation diagram is displayed Configuring the Result Display Return
49. They are configured in the Table Configuration tab of the Result Configuration dia log box which is displayed when you do one of the following Select the Result Configuration softkey in the main DOCSIS 3 1 menu This soft key is only available if a table result window is currently selected e Inthe Overview select a table result window from the Specifics for selection list then select the Result Configuration button R amp S FSW K192 K193 Configuration Table Config MER Data Pilot MER Data MER Pilot Center Frequency Error Sample Symbol Clock Error Trigger to PLC Time Stamp Ref Point Power Zero Bit Loaded Carrier Ratio 7757016307 3 Result Summary Fig 5 9 Result summary configuration For details on individual parameters see on page 13 Remote command Result Summary only WINDow lt n gt TABLe ITEM on page 222 Signal Content and Bitstream not available Access Overview 2 Result Config gt Display Settings or MEAS CONFIG gt Result Config gt Display Settings Display settings are available for specific graphical result displays User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 110 DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy They are configured in the Display Settings tab of the Result Configuration dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Select the Result Configuration softkey in the main DOCSIS 3 1 menu This soft key is on
50. This R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application User Manual provides all the information spe cific to the application All general instrument functions and settings common to all applications and operating modes are described in the main R amp S FSW User Manual The main focus in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are included Welcome to the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application Introduction to and getting familiar with the application Typical applications Example measurement scenarios in which the application is frequently used Measurements and Result Displays Details on supported measurements and their result types Measurement Basics Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the mea surement Configuration Analysis A concise description of all functions and settings available to configure measure ments and analyze results with their corresponding remote control command How to Perform Measurements in the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application The basic procedure to perform each measurement and step by step instructions for more complex tasks or alternative methods Measurement Examples Detailed measurement examples to guide you through typical measurement sce narios and allow you to try out the application immediately Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Hints and tips on how to handle errors and optimize the test setup Remote Comma
51. lt gt 7 lt 200 gt 5 rennes 266 DISPlayEWINDowsn ZOOM S TAT 265 CREE 239 eene FETCh FRAMS amp COUNEALL3 iiio tret th ener VETE EH rada 238 FETCH RRAMEG r 238 lt gt 2 184 FETCh SCDetailed AEL FORMAaII amp d erret tta three rh ch a 242 FETON SCDEtaled 22 242 FETCh SCSumMmay AUL 246 FETCh SUMMary lt parameter gt AVERage MAXimum MINimum 255 M 247 FETCh SUMMary CERRotMAXImImm3 ccrto trn etr treten rr ere a eX Exon 247 FETCh SUMMary CERROr MINimUtm nii ioo 248 FETCH SUMMary e rA uso RR EFE EAS EE e c 247 FETCh SUMMary FERRorMAXimb im ra Ren XR d dpud 248 FETCh SUMMary FERROG MINIMUM sc o
52. lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor Parameters lt Percentage gt Range 0 001 to 99 999 RST 99 999 Default unit Example PMET2 DCYC STAT ON Activates the duty cycle correction PMET2 DCYC VAL 0 5 Sets the correction value to 0 5 Manual operation See Duty Cycle on page 83 SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency lt Frequency gt This command defines the frequency of the power sensor Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Frequency gt The available value range is specified in the data sheet of the power sensor in use RST 50 MHz Example PMET2 FREQ 1GHZ Sets the frequency of the power sensor to 1 GHz Manual operation See Frequency Manual on page 82 SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency LINK lt Coupling gt This command selects the frequency coupling for power sensor measurements Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Coupling gt CENTer Couples the frequency to the center frequency of the analyzer 1 Couples the frequency to the position of marker 1 OFF Switches the frequency coupling off RST CENTer Example PMET2 FREQ LINK CENT Couples the frequency to the center frequency of the analyzer Manual operation See Frequency Coupling on page 82 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe lt Duration gt This command selects the duration of power sensor measuremen
53. AC or direct cur rent DC AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 172 Impedance For some measurements the reference impedance for the measured levels of the R amp S FSW can be set to 50 or 75 75 should be selected if the 50 input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a 75 adapter of the RAZ type 25 in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 174 Direct Path Enables or disables the use of the direct path for small frequencies In spectrum analyzers passive analog mixers are used for the first conversion of the input signal In such mixers the LO signal is coupled into the IF path due to its limited isolation The coupled LO signal becomes visible at the RF frequency 0 Hz This effect is referred to as LO feedthrough To avoid the LO feedthrough the spectrum analyzer provides an alternative signal path to the A D converter referred to as the direct path By default the direct path is selected automatically for RF frequenci
54. B320 B500 used automatically for bandwidths gt 80 MHz in this case use the IF WIDE OUTPUT connector The sample rate is larger than 200 MHz upsampling IF WIDE OUTPUT If a hardware option R amp S FSW B160 B320 B500 for bandwidth extension is instal led and activated i e for bandwidths gt 80 MHz the IF output is not available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector but rather at the additional IF WIDE OUTPUT con nector provided by the option In this case the IF output frequency cannot be defined manually but is determined automatically depending on the center frequency For details on the used frequencies see the data sheet The currently used output frequency is indicated in the field other wise used to define the frequency manually in the Output settings dialog box see IF Wide Out Frequency on page 85 IF 2 GHz Output For instrument models R amp S FSW26 43 50 67 85 the IF output can also be provided at the alternative IF OUT 2 GHZ output connector at a frequency of 2 GHz and with a bandwidth of 2 GHz The IF output can then be analyzed by a different instrument for example an R amp SGRTO oscilloscope If IF OUT 2 GHZ output is activated the measured values are no longer available on o the display thus the trace data currently displayed on the R amp S FSW becomes invalid A message in the status bar indicates this situation The message also indicates whether the sidebands of the IF spectrum output
55. Example INP 1Q BAL OFF Manual operation See Input Configuration on page 79 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO State This command defines whether the full scale level i e the maximum input power on the Baseband Input connector is defined automatically according to the reference level or manually Parameters State ON Automatic definition OFF Manual definition according to INPut 10 FULLscale LEVel on page 179 RST ON Example INP IQ FULL AUTO OFF INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel lt PeakVoltage gt This command defines the peak voltage at the Baseband Input connector if the full scale level is set to manual mode see 1NPut 10 FULLscale AUTO on 179 Parameters lt PeakVoltage gt 0 25V 0 5V 1V 2V Peak voltage level at the connector For probes the possible full scale values are adapted according to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed power RST 1V Example INP IQ FULL 0 5V This command defines the format of the input signal Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy 10 5 2 4 Parameters lt DataType gt Example Manual operation IQIIIQ IQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two input channels are required for each input signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature compo nent The in phase component of the input
56. MEAS CONFIG gt Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal Downstream Signal 51 e Upstream Signal 65 Downstream Signal Description Access Overview gt Signal Description gt Stream Direction Downstream or MEAS CONFIG gt Signal Description gt Stream Direction Downstream e OFDM Channel Description 1 51 e Continuous Pilots and Excluded Subcarrier 55 e Codeword Frame Configuraflof irre recie ine 58 e Profile Configuration Downstream sse 61 OFDM Channel Description Downstream Access Overview gt Signal Description gt OFDM Channel Description or MEAS CONFIG gt Signal Description gt OFDM Channel Description Down stream The general OFDM channel transmission settings are configured in the Signal Description dialog box DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy DOCSIS 3 1 DEM OFDM Channel Description Profile Configuration Codeword Configuration Stream Direction Center Frequency 13 25 GHz OFDM Spectrum Location 13 1476 GHz o Ner 4K mode Af 50 kHz Cydic Prefix CP 4 gt Roll off Auto Max Roll Off io
57. OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 206 5 3 3 4 DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 207 Send Trigger Output Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 207 Frequency Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Frequency or FREQ gt Frequency Config Stepsize Value Frequency Offset Value 0 0 Hz 87 Gener Frequency sce ase denen a 88 dice gAeUI M 88 Center frequency Defines the center frequency of the signal in Hertz The center frequency of the complete signal is dependant on the center frequency of the subcarrier 0 of the OFDM channel which defines the beginning of the OFDM spectrum If the OFDM Spectrum Locati
58. PLC preamble downstream only PLC data downstream only NCP all downstream only Individual profile A to P downstream current profile upstream Remote command SENSe OBJect SELect on page 223 Modulation The constellation diagram is restricted to the specified modulation type s A specific modulation cannot be selected if Object is set to All default Each modulation type is displayed by a different color using the following color map Fig 5 11 Color map for constellation points for different modulations By default all objects and all modulations are displayed in yellow If a single modulation type is selected the ideal constellation is also indicated in the display If multiple modulation types are selected the constellation is displayed in multiple col ors one for each modulation type Example If the object is restricted to Profile A and all modulation types are selected all modu lation types found for profile A are displayed in multiple colors If the object is restricted to Profile A and the modulation is restricted to QPSK any constellation points with QPSK modulation found for profile A are displayed in green and additionally the ideal QPSK constellation is displayed in gray in the same dia gram Remote command SENSe MODulation SELect on page 223 Subcarrier The constellation diagram is restricted to the specified subcarrier If All is selected the Constel
59. PPDU TIMING rere treten 103 Preamble Channel estimation cei dettes 208 Preamplifier Setting Softkey Presetting Channels edet 50 aiio M 97 Profiles ea 61 Programming examples tse 270 SEM ijui MEM 271 Protection RF INPUT nee meret ere aA 42 RF itip t remolte cente rt 172 R Reference level iisisti annann a 89 Digital well 89 Offset Power sensor 3 89 POWOF SOllSOF 83 B demc Value Reference marker 127 Refreshing TU 101 Remote commands B asicsOn Syntax ts nuansa sae DERI ee 140 Boolean valllGs eir tres 143 GapitaliZatiO m 3 si iere i ice ric b Me Re 141 Clhiaracter dala co ne 144 Data blocks onore 144 N meric values enti toro rea 143 Optional Keywords eiue 142 Parameters occorre feta etr 142 Strings Suffixes T naaa nan 96 c E 96 Resetting RE Input Protection nocte ene 42 172 Restoring Channel Settings rtt nes 50 Resuls MER vs Symbol X Carrier 257 Result configuration SOMKCY 2 reip de
60. Pilot Patterns 5 7 for Minislots with 8 Subcarriers For mode 716 subcarriers per minislot 16 different pilot patterns are available defined in the DOCSIS 3 1 specification 2 The figures show patterns for between 6 and 9 For gt 9 the complementary pilots are always located in the 7th and 9th symbols all symbols from the 10th symbol to end of frame carry data only Pilot locations are the same for any K DOCSIS 3 1 Upstream Signal Processing Body minislots E Eee L FEE Edge minislots m dH FH LLLI E _ LI T LI L EM H mm minislots EN nl Edge minislots Figure 7 39 Pilot Patterns 12 14 for Minislots with 16 Subcarriers DOCSIS 3 1 Upstream Signal Processing Frame structure The DOCSIS 3 1 specification 2 defines frames as follows Upstream transmission uses OFDMA frames Each OFDMA frame is comprised of a configurable number of OFDM symbols K Several transmitters may share the same OFDMA frame by transmitting data and pilots on allocated subcarriers of the OFDMA frame In upstream DOCSIS 3 1 signals a frame comprises the minislots that use the same frequency range within the OFDMA channel spectrum The following figure illustrates the frame structure for upstream transmission sunq 1 gt 1 K OFDM Symbols jsJnq 10 5 a
61. REFResh The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 applica tion This is useful for example after evaluation changes have been made This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated and only in single sweep mode Suffix lt n gt 1 2 irrelevant Example INIT REFR Usage Event Manual operation See Refresh on page 101 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 235 Starting a Measurement To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 236 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Sequencer State on page 47 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Its effect is similar to the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command used for a single measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 236 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Usage Event Manual operation See Sequencer State on page 47 INITia
62. See Number of Subcarriers on page 60 CONFigure DS CHANnel FCONfig lt i gt SUBCarrier STARt lt SubcarrierStart gt Defines the first subcarrier to which the selected codeword is assigned Suffix lt gt 1 1536 codeword index in the Codeword Frame Configuration table Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Parameters lt SubcarrierStart gt integer Subcarrier number Range 1 to 3745 4k 7537 8k Example CONF DS CHAN FCON2 SUBC STAR 1 Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See First Subcarrier on page 60 CONFigure DS CHANnel FCONfig lt i gt SYMBol COUNt lt NoSymbols gt Defines the number of symbols to which the selected codeword is assigned Suffix lt gt 1 1536 codeword index in the Codeword Frame Configuration table Parameters lt NoSymbols gt integer Range 1 to 4 Example CONF DS CHAN FCON2 SYMB COUN 3 Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Number of Symbols on page 60 CONFigure DS CHANnel FCONfig lt i gt SYMBol STARt lt SymbolStart gt Defines the first symbol to which the selected codeword is assigned Suffix lt i gt 1 1536 codeword index in the Codeword Frame Configuration
63. See Timing Error Tracking on page 103 Demodulation The demodulation settings define which PPDUs are to be analyzed thus they define a logical filter Manual configuration is described in chapter 5 3 8 Demodulation downstream only on page 103 SENSe DEMod CPILOG AUTO see cee wae a Deva edit cece ete evel 209 SENSe DEMod DECodei BIT Stree aimee 210 SENSe DEMod DEGCode CODGewOEdS 2 Paten des 210 SENS DEMOH NOP AU TQ RE a eee n pae rn pon Enea a Re a 211 SENSe DEMod CPILots AUTO lt ContinuousPilots gt Defines how continuous pilots are detected in the symbols Parameters lt ContinuousPilots gt SIGNAL USER SIGNAL Continuous pilots are detected in the signal automatically during demodulation USER The pilots must be configured manually using the CONFigure DS CHANnel CPES lt n gt SUBCarrier TYPE CPIL command Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Example DEM CPIL AUTO SIGNAL Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Auto Detection Continuous Pilots downstream only on page 58 SENSe DEMod DECode BITStream lt Mode gt Determines which bits of the data stream are decoded and then displayed in a Bit stream result display if activated see Bit
64. level and detected error bits are indicated Optionally the codewords are not decoded to save calculation time however in this case codeword error bits are not evaluated R amp S FSW K192 K193 Measurement Basics E Basis of Statistical Evaluation Various modulation accuracy parameters as well as the symbol constellation can be displayed graphically Graphical results are always based on a single frame The Bit stream and detailed signal content is also always provided for a single frame Which frame is to be evaluated is configurable see Selected Frame By default it is always the first detected frame in the capture buffer frame 0 The numeric results in the Result Summary and Signal Content Summary on the other hand are summarized over all frames in the current capture buffer by default Option ally they can be summarized over a specific number of frames see Frame Statistic Count Number of Frames to Analyze on page 107 In this case multiple measure ments are performed if necessary to obtain the required number of frames Using a defined number of frames to base statistics on makes the results more consistent as the number of frames detected in each measurement and which are thus available in the capture buffer may vary If evaluation is restricted to a single frame no statistics are calculated for the summarized results Note that frames from multiple measurements can be included in statistical evaluation
65. peo asser ka DH 181 lt gt 5 181 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt DEFine Solem PRESSCECHANDEI EXEC Ut EAREN ERTE E TENENTE SYSTEMS EQUENGCEH isis iei iiir t ent ei inves REY 200 TRAC SAAT AION 254 TRAGe IQISRAT eme d p tc D e 200 gt 254 lt gt 253 TRIGger SEQuernce BBPowert HOLJ Ot rn entr rrr nre rrr 201 TRIGger SEQuence 202 TRIGger SEQuericeFHOLDOofI TIME c nonne r ttn at O ENEE pena ee Ek t ERES 202 TRIGger SEQuerice IFPower HOLDofF ner rtt ntn enr peer e rere 202 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis ttr erre irr tr nh Perd 202 ptt T 203 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel F Power ss TRIGger SEQuence D EVel IQPOWSF eiie terree rrr tt rr ene
66. the following tasks specific to the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application are described here Common SUES EAEBFERARE QE Fee e REX 139 e IptrodBellol SEEKERS M MINIS 140 e Activating DOCSIS 3 1 Measurements reed redet ee et RR S 145 e Selecting a 0 00 149 e Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy 151 e Configuring Frequency Sweep Measurements on DOCSIS 3 1 Signals 214 e Configuring the Result Display eterne rho eo no xxt 215 e Starting a Measurement n ERE LL SEDI 232 Retrieving Resulls rn eee RR ne Re t 237 PII CITING OLI TEE 259 e talus ROgISIOls oen entree rag iren t ce ad e c 267 e Programming Examples for DOCSIS 3 1 270 10 1 Common Suffixes For the description of the remote commands in the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application the following common suffixes are used Table 10 1 Common suffixes for DOCSIS 3 1 measurements 1 0 data Suffix Value range Description lt n gt 1 16 Window lt t gt 1 Trace lt m gt 1 4 Marker R amp S FSW K192 K193 Remote Commands for DOCSIS 3 1 Measurements Table 10
67. trigger port 3 rear Parameters lt Length gt Pulse length in seconds Manual operation See Pulse Length on page 87 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy 10 5 6 Tracking and Channel Estimation SENSe see also SENSe commands sss nennen 208 ISENSeTCHANBGOESTNBUOD cual endo ca aes nto eram dees ara 208 SENSe TRACkingPHASSe 2 2 211r it ci tee eed L o Lp p La EYE YR Y YA 208 SENISETISACO TIME tona pa ve eme thee eo pee rapa pen appe 209 SENSe see also SENSe commands SENSe CHANnel ESTimation Mode This command determines how channels are detected and compensated for in the input signal Parameters Mode DOCSis Downstream only An optimal channel estimation using all available pilots is performed as defined in the DOCSIS 3 1 downstream standard OFF Downstream only The channel transfer function is not com pensated for in the measurement results EMER Upstream only default Equalized MER Measurements with linear distortions are equalized by the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application equalizer UMER Upstream only Unequalized MER Measurements with linear distortions are not equalized by the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application equalizer Only one carrier amplitude adjustment common for all subcarri ers and OFDM symbols in the burst is performed Only
68. 0 0 0 6 51 8807907104 40 8682556152 12 2 0 0 0 0 3 1 CWD 4096 53 1613197327 41 0502662659 1350 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 1 CWD 4096 53 3801498413 40 8685874939 1350 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Retrieving Results Table 10 6 Sample result for FETC SCD ALL FORM for upstream signal PIL BPSK 32 7226867676 53 2162704468 nan nan nan nan nan nan nan nan nan nan nan nan 0 0 CW QPSK 5 97550678253 53 2792778015 10 nan nan nan nan nan nan nan nan nan nan nan 0 nan CPIL BPSK 2 58250331879 53 2162590027 FETCh SCSummary ALL This command returns the following summarized signal content values for all code words as a comma separated list lt OBJECT gt lt MODULATION gt lt MER gt lt OBJECT COUNT gt lt BER_PRE gt lt BER_PRE_N gt lt BER_POST gt lt BER_POST_N gt lt CWERR_POST gt lt CWERR_POST_N gt Note this command is not available for upstream measurements For details on individual parameters see chapter 3 1 2 Signal Content Information on page 14 The information is provided for the following data elements in the stated order e Pilots e PLC Preambl
69. 0 3800 0 7600 Number of subcarrier Not available nan for pilots and compl pilots Low density parity check Number of iterations Not available nan for upstream lt _ gt lt _ _ gt lt BER_POST gt lt BER_POST_N gt lt CWERR_POST gt lt CWERR_POST_N gt lt RESERVED_1 gt lt RESERVED_2 gt lt RESERVED_3 gt lt RESERVED_4 gt Example Usage Manual operation Retrieving Results Low density parity check Absolute number of bit errors before decoding Not available nan for upstream Low density parity check Bit error ratio before decoding the ratio of errored bits to the total number of transmitted bits Not available nan for upstream Low density parity check Absolute number of bit errors after decoding Not available nan for upstream Low density parity check Bit error rate after decoding the ratio of falsely decoded bits to the total number of transmitted bits Not available nan for upstream Low density parity check Absolute number of codeword errors after decoding Not available nan for upstream Low density parity check Block error rate after decoding the ratio of falsely decoded codewords to the total number of trans mitted codewords Not available nan for upstream nan Currently not used FETC SCD ALL FORM Result see table 10 5 Query only See Signal Content Detailed on page 25 Table 10 5
70. 1 4 Parameters lt Level gt 20 to 20 dBm Range 20 dBm to 20 dBm RST 10 dBm Example PMET2 TRIG LEV 10 dBm Sets the level of the trigger Manual operation See External Trigger Level on page 84 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger SLOPe lt Edge gt This command selects the trigger condition for external power triggers Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Parameters lt Edge gt POSitive The measurement starts in case the trigger signal shows a posi tive edge NEGative The measurement starts in case the trigger signal shows a neg ative edge RST POSitive Example PMET2 TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 84 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger STATe lt State gt This command turns the external power trigger on and off This command requires the use of an R amp S NRP Z81 power sensor Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET2 TRIG ON Switches the external power trigger on Manual operation See Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 84 10 5 2 5 Configuring the Outputs Configuring trigger input output is described in chapter 10 5 5 2 Configuring the Trig ger Output on page 206 5
71. 10 frames SENS FRAM COUN STAT ON SENS FRAM COUN 10 Performing the Measurements Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a new measurement and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Query the I Q data from magnitude capture buffer for first ms 200 000 samples per second gt 200 samples TRAC1 10 DATA MEMory 0 200 Note result will be too long to display in IECWIN but is stored in log file Query the I Q data from magnitude capture buffer for second ms TRAC1 10 DATA MEMory 201 400 Note result will be too long to display in IECWIN but is stored in log file Query the number of frames detected in the current capture buffer FETC FRAM COUN Query the number of frames detected in all measurements FETC FRAM COUN ALL Select second frame frame 1 to be evaluated in graphical results SENS FRAM SEL STAT ON SENS FRAM SEL 1 Query constellation data window 4 in frame 1 TRAC4 DATA TRACE1 Note result will be too long to display in IECWIN but is stored in log file Query detailed signal content in frame 1 FETC SCD ALL Note result will be too long to display in IECWIN but is stored in log file Query maximum MER for pilots and data in frame 1 FETC SUMM MER MAX Query the limit for minimum MER for pilots and data and the result of the limit check Programming Examples for DOCSIS 3 1 Measurements CALC LIM SUMM MER MIN CALC LIM SU
72. 1900 Symbol 20 103 84 dB r 1 1 0 0 Hz 0 0 dB 1 1 Carrier 1900 Symbol 20 49 24 dBm Tip To navigate within long marker tables simply scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 216 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 252 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 261 MER vs Carrier Displays the modulation error ratio per carrier for the currently Selected Frame as indi cated in the Magnitude Capture display SSS ee ee SS User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 20 R amp S FSW K192 K193 Measurements and Result Display 1 MER vs Carrier CF 500 0 MHz 20 48 2 Span 204 8 MHz The carrier values can be provided as carrier numbers or carrier frequencies see ATIC Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MERC see ow on page 216 Results on page 213 on page 253 MER vs Symbol Displays the modulation error ratio per symbol for the currently Selected Frame as indi cated in the Magnitude Capture display 2 MER vs Symbol AR d rn y W Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MERS see 4 ow on page 216 Results on page 253 on page 213 User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 21 R amp S FSW K192 K193 Measurements and Result Display T E MER vs Symbol X Carrier Displays the modulation error ratio per carrier and symbol for the currently Selected Frame as indicate
73. 242 5 2 2 2 1 6 0 242 Retrieving Results FETCH SC SAMMAN AUT uod oss alind 246 FET Clie asia a wh weit Suena Ero AAE 247 5 enne enhn 247 CERRO MAXIMUM nera re un e ata der 247 FETCh SUMMary CERRorMINImUI cuui ierra detenti tt oko n REEN 248 FETCh SUMMary FERRoOI AVERagt ane eere in Re d ERR ERA 248 FETCh SUMMary FERRor MAXimum cessisse tenent 248 FETCh SUMMary FERRor MINIURI 1i Lco aa oce pev saco 248 FETCHSUMMary MER DAV ERAGE ea itti it irit eo ERI eo tene RR 248 248 FETCH SUMMary MER MINIMUM ta edente red been 248 FETCh SUMMary MERDatal AVERage 2 erreicht erudi ec sia anda teet pne E dd 248 FETCh SUMMary MERData MAXimum eiiis aE aana na s M 248 5 12
74. 280 The following data types are allowed int8 8 bit signed integer data int16 16 bit signed integer data int32 32 bit signed integer data float32 32 bit floating point data IEEE 754 float64 64 bit floating point data IEEE 754 ScalingFactor Optional describes how the binary data can be transformed into values in the unit Volt The binary data itself has no unit To get an sample in the unit Volt the saved samples have to be multiplied by the value of the ScalingFactor For polar data only the magnitude value has to be multiplied For multi channel signals the ScalingFactor must be applied to all channels The attribute unit must be set to v The ScalingFactor must be gt 0 If the ScalingFactor element is not defined value of 1 V is assumed NumberOfChan nels Optional specifies the number of channels e g of a MIMO signal contained in the I Q data binary file For multi channels the samples of the channels are expected to be interleaved within the data file see chapter A 2 2 Data Binary File on page 280 If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is assumed Data File Format iq tar Element DataFilename Description Contains the filename of the I Q data binary file that is part of the iq tar file It is recommended that the filename uses the following convention lt xyz gt lt Format gt lt Channels gt ch lt Type
75. 9375 us 128 Samples 1 25 us 160 Samples 1 5625 ys 192 Samples 1 875 us The maximum possible roll off period is used automatically No samples in the roll off period for no transmit windowing The roll off period contains 64 samples and lasts 0 3125 The roll off period contains 128 samples and lasts 0 625 us The roll off period contains 192 samples and lasts 0 9375 ys The roll off period contains 256 samples and lasts 1 25 us The roll off period contains 256 samples and lasts 1 25 us The roll off period contains 256 samples and lasts 1 25 us R amp S FSW K192 K193 Configuration 224 Samples roll off period contains 256 samples and lasts 1 25 us 2 1875 us Remote command CONFigure CHANnel ROFF on page 153 Symbols Per Frame K Defines the number of symbols per frame to be expected The available number of symbols per frame varies depending on the used bandwidth and Nee FFT length Values between 6 and 18 are allowed for 4K mode values between 6 and 36 for 2K mode Remote command CONFigure US CHANnel SYMBols on page 158 Excluded Subcarrier Assignment Access Overview Signal Description OFDM Channel Description Excluded Subcarriers Configuration or MEAS CONFIG gt Signal Description gt OFDM Channel Description gt Excluded Subcarriers Configuration Some subcarriers are excluded for transmission Such subcarriers must be configured so that th
76. Bitstream result displays 5 3 10 3 DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Bitstream Format Bytes Bitstream Layout Expanded Fig 5 13 Result configuration settings for Bitstream results Bitstream t ONSE cei er Fu ti E 114 BilsireambayOL n o A NER 114 Bitstream Format Determines whether the data is displayed as bits or bytes default in a Bitstream result display if activated see Bitstream downstream only on page 17 Remote command UNIT BITStream page 231 Bitstream Layout Determines whether a compact or expanded view of the bits are displayed in the Bit stream result display if activated see Bitstream downstream only on page 17 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt BITStream LAYout on page 222 Y Scaling Settings Access Overview gt Result Config gt Y Scaling or MEAS CONFIG gt Result Config gt Scaling The scaling for the vertical axis in most graphical displays is highly configurable using either absolute or relative values These settings are described here R amp S FSW K192 K193 Configuration OE Ew Result Configuratio Markers Marker Settings Automatic Grid Scaling Auto Mode Auto Fix Range Hysteresis Interval Upper HIU Hysteresis Interval Lower HIL Number of Divisions 10 Per Division 10 multiples of 1 0 2
77. CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt SELect lt Profile gt This command selects the specified profile for further operation e g configuration Suffix lt j gt 1 200 irrelevant Parameters lt Profile gt A B C DJE FIG H I J K L M N O P NONE Example CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig SELect A CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig COUNt Returns the number of entries in the Modulation Subcarrier Assignment table for the profile A Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Profile List on page 62 CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt STATe This command returns the state of the currently selected profile that is whether the profile contains configuration entries or not Use the CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt SELect command to select pro file Suffix lt i gt 1 200 irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 The profile is empty ON 1 The profile contains configuration entries for at least one subcar rier RST 0 Example CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig SELect A CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig STATe Returns the state of the Modulation Subcarrier Assignment table for the profile A Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 1 09 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Usage Query only
78. CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt SUBCarrier INCRement lt Increment gt Defines the increment for a series of subcarriers to be configured identically in the Modulation Subcarrier Assignment table for the currently selected profile Use the CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt SELect command to select pro file Suffix lt gt 1 200 index the Modulation Subcarrier Assignment table for the cur rently selected profile Parameters lt Increment gt Value between 1 and maximum number of subcarriers Example CONF DS CHAN PCON2 SUBC INCR 10 Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Start Increment Stop on page 63 CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt SUBCarrier MODulation ModType DS Defines the modulation used by the specified subcarriers in the currently selected pro file Use the CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt SELect command to select a pro file Suffix lt gt 1 200 index the Modulation Subcarrier Assignment table for the cur rently selected profile Parameters ModType DS ZEROBIT QPSK QAM16 QAM64 QAM128 QAM256 512 QAM1024 QAM2048 QAM4096 8192 QAM16384 Example CONF DS CHAN PCON2 SUBC MOD QAM16 Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual
79. DOCSIS 3 1 application 13 Select the Display Config button and select the displays that are of interest to you up to 16 Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 14 Exit the SmartGrid mode 15 Start a new sweep with the defined settings e To perform a single sweep measurement press the RUN SINGLE hardkey e To perform a continuous sweep measurement press the RUN CONT hardkey Measurement results are updated once the measurement has completed 16 To restrict the number of numeric results displayed in the Result Summary table select the result display then select Result Config In the Table Config tab deactivate the information you want to hide in the tables 17 To restrict constellation results to specific subcarriers or symbols select the Con stellation result display then the Result Config button In the Display Settings tab define which data you want to analyze 18 To scroll through the results for individual frames in graphical results select the Evaluation Range softkey and change the Selected Frame number 19 To configure the y axis scaling for graphical results select the result display then select Result Config In the Y Scaling tab do one of the following e Set Auto to Off then configure the Min and Max values for the y axis range e Set the Auto Mode to Memory and select the number of results to consider for rescaling Memory Depth e Set the Auto Mod
80. Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range O sto 10 05 RST 08 Manual operation See Drop Out Time on page 96 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME lt Offset gt Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement Parameters lt Offset gt RST Os Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 96 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command can be used for any trigger source not just IF Power despite the legacy keyword Parameters Period Range Os to 10s RST 0s Example TRIG SOUR EXT Sets an external trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 97 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trig ger sources Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 97 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower lt Level gt This co
81. Digital enhanced mode is used i e the connected device supports transfer rates up to 200 Msps only the general purpose bits and 1 are available as Digital trigger source The following table describes the assignment of the general purpose bits to the LVDS connector pins For details on the LVDS connector see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer User Manual Table 5 1 Assignment of general purpose bits to LVDS connector pins Bit LVDS pin GPO SDATAA P Trigger1 GP1 SDATAA P Trigger2 GP2 SDATAO P Reserve1 SDATAA P Reserve2 GP4 SDATAO P Marker1 GP5 SDATAA P 2 not available for Digital 1 enhanced mode Remote command TRIG SOUR GPO see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 204 R amp S FSW K192 K193 Configuration e P Sees IF Power Trigger Source Trigger Source Settings The R amp S FSW starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger band width at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For measurements on a fixed frequency e g zero span or measurements the third IF represents the center frequency This trigger source is only available for RF input It is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface or the optio
82. ER 96 m ER astral alec aca eu 96 MI oo NIE ENIM 97 ME Hio URN T 97 uos MRMMTU VO 97 TAGGET x 97 EEUU EI C REO EET TP 98 27 ER 98 EDT 98 L Send TRO Adesadoc idunt odes ation cup 98 Trigger Source Settings The Trigger Source settings define when data is captured Trigger Source Trigger Source Settings Defines the trigger source If a trigger source other than Free Run is set TRG is displayed in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 204 Free Run Trigger Source Trigger Source Settings No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 204 External Trigger 1 2 3 Trigger Source Trigger Source Settings Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 96 Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector on the front panel For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the
83. ERR EY EX ERES ERR 248 FETCh SUMMary FERRor AVERage FETCh SUMMaty MER MAXIImBITI succurri rrt n RR Een ied e HX XR Eo dE EHE XN E ERE 248 FETCh SUMMary MER MINiIm m 3 iain ine rer epe PER o ERR EY EXPE 248 FETGh SUMMaB MER AVERage irent ethernet org ena ea ey xe redeo RU SERE EE MESE ENTE CIE sus 248 FETCh SUMMaty MERData MAXimb lri enar tinere tn trn it pente 248 FETCh SUMMary MERData MINimm i inicia tk na rer t er tanen aet rh rhe pape e ERR Erud 248 FETCh SUMMary MERData AVERAage reta itcr pe Ne E EET 248 FETCRh SUMMaty MERPIIGEMAXIIUEI cette rtr epp nh nne reped a ehe epa orare Ede tix 248 FETCh SUMMary MERPilot MINimmUtmm7 rt ee ert kir re o Ree EYES ee 248 FETCH netu ey v oa Leg 248 5 35 5 terere eot nen trn dr nere Ede 248 FETCh SUMMary PERRor MINimum FETCH SUMMary PERROMAV ERAGE eate Een AEAEE A TOE
84. Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Time Interleaving Depth on page 54 CONFigure SDIRection lt StreamDirection gt Defines the direction of the signal stream to be analyzed Various configuration param eters for the DOCSIS 3 1 measurement depend on the stream direction 10 5 1 2 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy Parameters lt StreamDirection gt US DS DS Downstream signal from the base station to the cable modems Requires R amp S FSW K192 option US Upstream signal from the cable modems to the base station Requires R amp S FSW K193 option RST DS Manual operation See Stream Direction on page 52 OFDM Upstream Channel Description Useful commands for upstream channels described elsewhere CONFigure SDIRection on page 155 CONFigure CHANnel NFFT on page 152 Remote commands exclusive to upstream channels GON Figure CHANDE er eio RARE saunas 156 CONFigure CHANS ROFF 157 CONFigure US CHANnSESYMBOlS itia iater eu eate t ehe 158 CONFigure CHANnel CP lt CyclicPrefix gt upstream Defines the cyclic prefix which determines where the useful data starts and allows the application to detect delay spreads during transmission The longer the delay spread the lon
85. Exduded Subcarriers Configuration Fig 5 6 OFDM channel description for upstream DOCSIS 3 1 signals Stream Directo 2 rane XS MR ERIS NAR QUIE 66 Center m 67 OFDM LOCO unos cocto to tl ER eod x ee tee qr da 67 E 67 mdp qs M 67 ilo PME 68 Frannie M oos rete e EE rer re EE ute Ene ro 69 Stream Direction Defines the direction of the signal stream to be analyzed Various configuration param eters for the DOCSIS 3 1 measurement depend on the stream direction Downstream default Downstream signal from the CMTS to the cable modems Requires R amp S FSW K192 option Upstream Upstream signal from the cable modems to the CMTS Requires R amp S FSW K193 option Remote command CONFigure SDIRection on page 155 User Manual 1 175 6490 02 04 66 DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Center frequency Defines the center frequency of the signal in Hertz The center frequency of the complete signal is dependant on the center frequency of the subcarrier 0 of the OFDM channel which defines the beginning of the OFDM spectrum If the OFDM Spectrum Location is changed then the general center fre quency is also changed and vice versa Re
86. Frame Statistic Count option and enter the Number of Frames to Analyze User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 133 R amp S FSW K192 K193 Perform Measurements in the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application 18 Select the Display Config button and select the displays that are of interest to you up to 16 Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 19 Exit the SmartGrid mode 20 Start a new sweep with the defined settings e To perform a single sweep measurement press the RUN SINGLE hardkey e To perform a continuous sweep measurement press the RUN CONT hardkey Measurement results are updated once the measurement has completed 21 To restrict the number of numeric results displayed in the Result Summary or Sig nal Content Detailed tables select the result display then select Result Config In the Table Config tab deactivate the information you want to hide in the tables 22 To restrict constellation results to specific subcarriers or symbols select the Con stellation result display then the Result Config button In the Display Set tings tab define which data you want to analyze 23 To scroll through the results for individual frames in graphical results select the Evaluation Range softkey and change the Selected Frame number 24 To configure the y axis scaling for graphical results select the result display then select Result Config In the Y Scaling tab do one of the following e S
87. MER 107 BE MN 108 E H 108 d MM EE 108 uoo e 108 o o MAR M 108 Analyzing a single frame Specified Frame If Specified Frame is enabled the DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 results are based on one individ ual frame only namely the one defined in Selected Frame Statistic evaluation for numeric results is not performed as only one result is available for each frame param eter DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy If disabled all detected frames in the capture buffer or the Frame Statistic Count Number of Frames to Analyze if enabled are evaluated for numeric results For graphical results the first frame to be detected in the capture buffer frame 0 is auto matically selected for evaluation Remote command SENSe FRAMe SELect STATe on page 214 Selected Frame If single frame evaluation is enabled see Analyzing a single frame Specified Frame the specified frame number is evaluated in all graphical and numeric result displays If single frame evaluation is disabled the first frame to be detected the capture buf fer frame 0 is automatically selected for evaluation Note that only frames in the current capture buffer can be analyzed and displayed indi vidually even if frames from multiple mea
88. MER Data Pilot MER dB Modulation error ratio for data and pilot carriers MER Data MERD dB Modulation error ratio for data carriers only MER Pilot MERP dB Modulation error ratio for pilot carriers only Center Frequency Error CERR Hz Sample Symbol Clock FERR ppm Error DOCSIS 3 11 Measurement Parameter Keyword for Unit Description remote com mand Trigger to PLC Time TPLC us Downstream only Stamp Ref point Trigger to Frame TFR us Upstream only Power POW Total power of OFDM channel all subcarriers Unit depends on Unit setting dBuV Zero Bit Loaded Carrier ZBIT Downstream only Rato Upstream result summary returns NAN value Average ratio of the zero bit loaded subcarriers to the total number of carriers available for the codewords Remote commands When you query all results of the result summary using the FETCh SUMMary ALL command the values are returned in the order the parameters are described in table table 3 1 For each parameter several evaluations are calculated for the entire input signal The remote commands required to retrieve the results are indicated in the following table Table 3 2 Calculated summary results Result Description Remote command type Mean Mean measured value FETCh SUMMary lt parameter gt AVERage Max Maximum measured value FETCh SUMMary lt parameter gt MAXimum Min Minimum measured value FETCh SUMMary lt
89. N Time Interleaving Depth PLC Start Index L Auto 2044 PLC Modulation 16 QAM PLC Number of Subcarrier N 8 NCP Modulation Continuous Pilots Excluded Subcarriers Configuration Fig 5 2 OFDM channel description for downstream DOCSIS 3 1 signals Stream Ont aoc duod 52 eum 53 OFDM D 53 53 vire AT 53 lllo M 54 Titge Inteineaying Deplly xat ER ttt E eR EH 54 PLC Ston MEO E eC bna RE dee 54 ore Ti uio e 55 PLC Namberor EE 55 55 Stream Direction Defines the direction of the signal stream to be analyzed Various configuration param eters for the DOCSIS 3 1 measurement depend on the stream direction Downstream default Downstream signal from the CMTS to the cable modems Requires R amp S FSW K192 option Upstream Upstream signal from the cable modems to the CMTS Requires R amp S FSW K193 option Remote command CONFigure SDIRection on page 155 DOCSIS 3 1 1 09 Measurem
90. PLC modulation CONF DS CHAN PLC MOD Result 16 Query the number of subcarriers used by the PLC CONF DS CHAN PLC CARR Result 8 Configure continuous pilots on every 50th subcarrier from 250 to 500 5 52 50 CPIL CONF DS CHAN CPES2 S8UBC STAR 250 5 52 50 5 500 DS 52 50 50 Exclude subcarriers 324 to 328 356 to 357 CONF DS CHAN CPES3 SUBC TYPE ESUB CONF DS CHAN CPES3 SUBC SET 324 325 326 327 328 356 357 Query the number of entries in the Continuous Pilots and Excluded Subcarrier Assignment table Programming Examples for DOCSIS 3 1 Measurements CONF DS CHAN CPES1 COUN Result 3 PLC is default entry 1 Configure profile A Assign 16 QAM modulation for excluded subcarriers and pilots Assign 4096 QAM for all other subcarriers CONF DS CHAN PCON SEL CONF DS CHAN PCON1 SUBC STAR 0 CONF DS CHAN PCON1 SUBC STOP 8191 CONF DS CHAN PCON1 SUBC INCR 1 DS CHAN PCON1 SUBC MOD QAM4096 CONF DS CHAN PCON2 SUBC SET 324 325 326 327 328 356 357 CONF DS CHAN PCON2 SUBC MOD QAM16 DS CHAN PCON3 SUBC STAR 250 DS CHAN PCON3 SUBC STOP 500 DS CHAN PCON3 SUBC INCR 50 DS CHAN PCON3 SUBC MOD QAM16 Query the number of entries in the Profile
91. POW status register and the INPUT OVLD message in the status bar are cleared The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first Usage Event INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 75 INPut DPATh lt State gt Enables or disables the use of the direct path for frequencies close to 0 Hz Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Parameters lt State gt AUTO 1 Default the direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to 0 Hz OFF 0 The analog mixer path is always used RST 1 Example INP DPAT OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Direct Path on page 75 INPut FILTer HPASs STATe lt State gt Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to mea sure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires an additional high pass filter hardware option Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Parameters
92. Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 77 10 5 2 3 Configuring Input via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface The following commands are required to control the optional Analog Baseband Inter face in a remote environment They are only available if this option is installed Useful commands for Analog Baseband data described elsewhere INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on page 174 SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 193 Commands for the Analog Baseband calibration signal are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote commands exclusive to Analog Baseband data input and output 22 2 kenne ce thee n ern ra a Eran nk hber harena dro 178 INPURIOS PULL Seale AUT O red ecd corned ba Ea ee cerea bua teen 179 INPutIQ F LEscale EVel Encre eee ue Eee 179 IL LEE 179 5 22000 0000 180 INPut IQ BALanced STATe lt State gt This command defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all 4 Analog Baseband connectors or as a plain signal via 2 single ended lines Parameters lt State gt ON Differential OFF Single ended RST ON
93. Placeholder gt Currently not evaluated lt SerialNo gt Serial number of a connected power sensor Query parameters lt Type gt The power sensor type e g NRP Z81 lt Interface gt Currently not evaluated Return values lt Placeholder gt Currently not used lt Type gt Detected power sensor type e g NRP Z81 Interface Interface the power sensor is connected to always USB lt SerialNo gt Serial number of the power sensor assigned to the specified index Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET2 DEF NRP Z81 1123456 Assigns the power sensor with the serial number 123456 to the configuration Power Sensor 2 SYST COMM RDEV PMET2 DEF Queries the sensor assigned to Power Sensor 2 Result 281 USB 1234567 NRP Z81 power sensor with the serial number 123456 is assigned to the Power Sensor 2 Manual operation See Select on page 81 Configuring Power Sensor Measurements CALibration PMETer p ZERO AUTO nns 183 lt gt lt gt 183 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO 183 lt gt lt gt 184
94. Post Absolute number of codeword errors after decoding BLER Post Block error rate after decoding the ratio of falsely decoded codewords to the total number of transmitted codewords 3 1 3 Evaluation Methods for DOCSIS 3 1 Measurements Access Overview gt Display Config or MEAS gt Display Config The captured I Q data from the DOCSIS 3 1 signal can be evaluated using various dif ferent methods without having to start a new measurement or sweep Which results are displayed depends on the selected evaluation The following evaluation methods can be selected for the default DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 mea surement Bitstream downstream 2 17 enc a 18 Group Delay gi Ceu UE Li UE 19 Magnitude Capture Em 19 20 MER S CI M 20 MER 24 Rc 21 MER vs Symbol X GatflgE 22 Power vs Canter upstream Only iets ioc eret nde dta ce eet anaes exe d 22 Powar ys Symbol coe to teer uite bee erret zu Ene 23 SGC 24 Rosul SUMINI 24
95. R amp S FSW R amp S FSW8 13 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW26 or higher 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two RST OFF 10 5 4 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy Example INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 91 INPut GAIN STATe lt State gt This command turns the preamplifier on and off It requires the optional preamplifier hardware Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 91 Signal Capturing The following commands are required to configure how much and how data is captured from the input signal INPutEFIETerACHannels STATO ceci aperti oae renasci v edad xao 198 ouis Ene ades DEUS en 199 SENSE SWEep LENG M 199 0 446 tette tert te tette 200 TRACE 200 TRACHI SRAT s M 200 INPut FILTer ACHannels STATe State This remote control command enables or disables use of the adjacent channel filter This command is only available for DOCSIS 3 1 downstream measurements If activated only the useful signal is analyzed all signal dat
96. SEQuencer State This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will A detailed programming example is provided the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt State gt OFF 0 1 ON 1 The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately OFF 0 Sequencer deactivated Any running sequential measure ments are stopped Further Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 10 9 10 9 1 Retrieving Results Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYST SEQ OFF Manual operation See Sequencer State on page 47 Retrieving Results The following commands are required to retrieve the results from a DOCSIS 3 1 mea surement in a remote environment The OPC command should be used after commands that retrieve data so that subse quent commands to change the trigger or data capturing settings are held off until after the data capture is completed and the data has been returned Numeric Modulation Accuracy 237 Numeric Results for Frequency Sweep
97. Sample result for FETC SCD ALL FORM for downstream signal 0 0 NCPCWC QAM 1 0 NCPCWC QAM 2 0 NCPCWA QAM 0 0 NCPC24 QAM 3 1 NCPCWD QAM 4 1 NCPCWD QAM 1 1 NCPC24 QAM PIL BPSK 53 1588020325 34 8106689453 PLCP BPSK 52 8738098145 40 8754196167 PLCD 16 53 4272041321 40 8166618347 0 0 0 0 6 53 4041290283 41 4880905151 12 1 0 0 0 0 6 52 8550567627 39 9809684753 12 2 0 0 0 0 6 53 2005882263 41 4098701477 12 2 0 0 0 0 6 52 7113189697 40 9022140503 12 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 QAM1024 53 3149108887 40 9032096863 1620 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 CWC 1024 53 2711219788 40 9649543762 1620 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 CWA 64 53 330871582 40 7523536682 2700 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 52 2366638184 41 4213371277 12 2 0 0 0 0 6 54 4256401062 38 9862823486 12 2 0
98. See Meas Time Average on page 82 SENSe PMETer lt p gt ROFFset STATe State This command includes or excludes the reference level offset of the analyzer for power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Parameters lt State gt ON 1 Includes the reference level offset in the results OFF 0 Ignores the reference level offset RST 1 Example PMET2 ROFF OFF Takes no offset into account for the measured power Manual operation See Use Ref Lev Offset on page 83 SENSe PMETer lt p gt STATe lt State gt This command turns a power sensor on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example Switches the power sensor measurements on Manual operation See State on page 81 See Select on page 81 SENSe PMETer lt p gt UPDate STATe lt State gt This command turns continuous update of power sensor measurements on and off If on the results are update even if a single sweep is complete Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET1 UPD ON The data from power sensor 1 is updated continuously Manual operation See Continuous Value Update on page 81 UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer Unit This command selects the unit for abso
99. Trace to ASCII File on page 124 R amp S FSW K192 K193 Remote Commands for DOCSIS 3 1 Measurements ee SS SS SSS See ee ee ee ee ee ee eee 10 10 3 Zooming into the Display 10 10 3 1 Using the Single Zoom DISPlay WINDowsn ZOONMCARBDA 5 122 aoi nao Io reo hu 265 DISPlayEWINDow sn ZOONM S TAT caca putt appe tah xe ne adeo ute rapa ini rua 265 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt 1 gt lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm MU e 2 000519931 GHz 498 pts 1 24 MHz Span 12 435008666 MHz 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt 2 gt lt 2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 128 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 128 See Restore Original Display on
100. WINDow lt n gt REPLace lt WindowType gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow com mand add a new window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 216 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY WIND2 REPL MTAB Replaces the result display in window 2 with a marker table 10 7 3 Configuring Specific Result Displays The following command configure specific result displays DISPlay WINDowe n BITStream LAYOUL coincide eite eet eese nnb n asd x dad alas 222 bISPlayPWINDowsns T TABLET EM aa noche 222 SENS GMO DUAN ORES Leal rane er eee br a od at t epe ER dt 223 SENSe OBJecESEEeGL 1 oii ne Pe ERR RAP Y 223 SENSe SUBGalHer SE lel TRE RET RR 224 SENSe1SYMBDaESELal iet ite e ede pp e tet ee rane da Dc end 225 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt BITStream LAYout View Determines whether a compact or expanded view of the bits are displayed in the Bit stream result display if activated see Bitstream downstream only on page 17 Parameters View COMPact
101. XML lt PreviewData gt lt ArrayOfChannel length 1 gt lt Channel gt PowerVs Min gt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt f lt f loat gt 134 lt float gt loat 142 float lt f loat gt 140 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 70 lt float gt lt float gt 71 lt float gt 2 2 Data File Format iq tar float 69 float ArrayOfFloat lt gt lt PowerVsTime gt lt Spectrum gt lt Min gt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 133 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt float 67 float lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt float gt 70 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt Spectrum gt IQ Histogram width 64 height 64 gt 0123456789 0 lt Histogram gt 105 lt 1 gt lt ArrayOfChannel gt lt PreviewData gt Data Binary File The I Q data is saved in binary format according to the format and data type specified in the XML file see Format element and DataType element To allow reading and writing of streamed data all data is interleaved i e complex values are interleaved pairs of and Q values and multi channel signals contain inter
102. a better signal to noise level or a smaller bandwidth filter than the default measurement on data provides and must be determined in separate measure ments based on RF data see chapter 3 2 Frequency Sweep Measurements on page 27 In these measurements demodulation is not performed The R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application uses the functionality of the R amp S FSW base system Spectrum application to perform the DOCSIS 3 1 frequency sweep measure ments Some parameters are set automatically according to the DOCSIS 3 1 standard the first time a measurement is selected since the last PRESET operation These parameters can be changed but are not reset automatically the next time you re enter the measurement Refer to the description of each measurement type for details The main measurement configuration menus for the DOCSIS 3 1 frequency sweep measurements are identical to the Spectrum application For details refer to Measurements in the R amp S FSW User Manual e Occupied ies 119 Occupied Bandwidth Access Overview gt Select Measurement gt OBW or MEAS gt Select Measurement gt OBW The Occupied Bandwidth measurement is performed as in the Spectrum application with default settings Frequency Sweep Measurements Table 5 2 Predefined settings for DOCSIS 3 1 OBW measurements Setting Default value Power Bandwidth 99 Channel bandwidth 3 84 MHz The Occu
103. always available as first entry CPIL Continuous pilot ESUB Excluded subcarrier Example CONF DS CHAN CPES2 SUBC TYPE CPIL Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Type on page 56 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy CONFigure US CHANnel ESUB lt i gt COUNt Queries the number of entries in the Excluded Subcarrier Assignment table Suffix lt i gt 1 200 irrelevant Return values lt Entries gt integer Range 1 to 200 Example CONF US CHAN ESUB COUN Usage Query only Manual operation See Set Index on page 70 CONFigure US CHANnel ESUB lt i gt SUBCarrier INCRement Subcarrierlncrement Defines the increment for a series of subcarriers to be configured identically in the Excluded Subcarrier Assignment table Suffix lt i gt 1 200 index in the Excluded Subcarrier Assignment table Parameters lt Increment gt Range 1 to 2K mode 2047 4K mode 4095 Example CONF US CHAN ESUB2 SUBC INCR 10 Manual operation See Subcarrier Range Start Increment Stop page 70 CONFigure US CHANnel ESUB lt i gt SUBCarrier SET lt Subcarrier gt lt Subcarrier gt Defines a comma separated list of discrete subcarriers to be configured identically in the Excluded Subcarrier Assignment table Suffix lt i
104. and turns the measure ment on The suffixes n and lt m gt are irrelevant Parameters lt MeasType gt OBANdwidth OBWidth Occupied bandwidth measurement Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 2 Measurement 2 Determining the Occupied Bandwidth on page 275 Manual operation See Occupied Bandwidth on page 27 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer STATe lt State gt This command turns a power measurement on and off The suffixes lt gt and lt gt are irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF ON 1 The power measurement selected with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect is activated OFF 0 A standard DOCSIS 3 1 I Q Modulation Accuracy measure ment is activated RST OFF Usage Setting only CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe lt State gt This command turns the CCDF on and off If the CCDF measurement is deactivated a standard DOCSIS 3 1 Modulation Accuracy measurement is activated The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC STAT CCDF ON Switches on the CCDF measurement Manual operation See CCDF on page 28 10 5 10 5 1 10 5 1 1 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modu lation Accuracy The following commands are required to configure the DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 measurement described
105. are in normal or inverted order com pared to the RF signal which depends on the used center frequency Prerequisites Note the following prerequisites for output to the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector e Instrument model R amp S FSW26 43 50 67 85 external mixers can be used e Zero span mode Analyzer or VSA R amp S FSW K70 application Center frequency gt 8 GHz 4 5 Preparing the R amp S FSW for the Expected Input Signal Frontend Parameters On the R amp S FSW the input data can only be processed optimally if the hardware set tings match the signal characteristics as closely as possible On the other hand the hardware must be protected from powers or frequencies that exceed the allowed limits Therefore you must set the hardware so that it is optimally prepared for the expected input signal without being overloaded You do this using the frontend parameters Consider the following recommendations User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 Preparing the R amp S FSW for the Expected Input Signal Frontend Parameters Reference level Adapt the R amp S FSW s hardware to the expected maximum signal level by setting the Reference Level to this maximum Compensate for any external attenuation or gain by defining a Reference Level offset Attenuation To optimize the signal to noise ratio of the measurement for high signal levels and to protect the R amp S FSW from hardware damage provide for a high attenuation Use AC coupling
106. can select one specific trace only for export see Trace to Export The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row Remote command FORMat DEXPort TRACes on page 264 Include Instrument Measurement Settings Includes additional instrument and measurement settings in the header of the export file for result data Remote command FORMat DEXPort HEADer on page 263 Trace to Export Defines an individual trace that will be exported to a file This setting is not available if Export all Traces and all Table Results is selected Decimal Separator Defines the decimal separator for floating point numerals for the data export files Eval uation programs require different separators in different languages Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 263 Markers Export Trace to ASCII File Opens file selection dialog box and saves the selected trace in ASCII format dat to the specified file and directory The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data pe
107. chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See NCP Modulation on page 55 CONFigure DS CHANnel PLC CARRiers Queries the number of subcarriers used by the PLC The number of subcarriers depends on the FFT length setting see CONFigure CHANnel NFFT on page 152 Example CONF DS CHAN PLC CARR Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Usage Query only Manual operation See PLC Number of Subcarriers N on page 55 CONFigure DS CHANnel PLC INDex lt PicIndex gt Defines the start index of the physical link channel PLC if automatic detection is dis abled see CONFigure DS CHANnel PLC INDex AUTO on page 154 Setting parameters lt Plclndex gt RST 1 Example CONF DS CHAN PLC IND 200 Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See PLC Start Index L on page 54 CONFigure DS CHANnel PLC INDex AUTO lt State gt If enabled the start index of the physical link channel PLC is detected automatically If disabled the numeric value defined by CONFigure DS CHANnel PLC INDex is used Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example CONF DS CHAN PLC IND AUTO Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual op
108. configuration table CONF DS CHAN PCON COUN Result 3 Query the state of profile B CONF DS CHAN PCON SEL B CONF DS CHAN PCON STAT Result 0 Query the number of entries in the Profile configuration table CONF DS CHAN FCON COUN Result 1 Configure the codewords in the frames Profile A is used for the first 1620 carriers CONF DS CHAN FCON1 PROF A CONF DS CHAN FCON1 SUBC STAR 0 CONF DS CHAN FCON1 SUBC COUN 1620 Profile A is used for the next 2700 carriers requires 2 symbols CONF DS CHAN FCON2 PROF A CONF DS CHAN FCON2 SUBC STAR 1620 CONF DS CHAN FCON2 SUBC COUN 2700 CONF DS CHAN FCON2 SYMB COUN Result 2 Configuring Data Acquisition Each measurement captures data for 6 ms SWE TIME 6ms Query the used sample rate TRAC IQ SRAT Result 204 8 MHZ Programming Examples for DOCSIS 3 1 Measurements Query number of samples SWE LENG Number of samples captured per measurement 0 006s 204 8e6 samples per second 1228800 samples Query the analysis bandwidth TRAC IQ BWID Result 192 0 MHz Tracking and channel estimation Disable all tracking and compensation functions SENS TRAC PHAS OFF SENS TRAC TIME OFF Demodulation Activate codeword decoding SENS DEM DEC COD ON Configuring the result displays Activate following result displa
109. depends on the Unit setting 2 Power Spectrum CF 500 0 MHz 20 48 MHz Span 204 8 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PSP see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 216 Results SENSe FRAMe SELect on page 213 TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 253 Result Summary The result summary provides the numerical results for the main DOCSIS 3 1 parame ters summarized over a specified number of frames or for a single frame namely the currently Selected Frame as indicated in the Magnitude Capture display If more than one frame is evaluated that is Analyzing a single frame Specified Frame is not enabled a statistical evaluation of the specified Frame Statistic Count Number of Frames to Analyze on page 107 or for all detected frames in the capture buffer is also performed In this case the minimum maximum and mean values are displayed as well as the defined limit if available For details on the evaluation basis see Basis of Statistical Evaluation on page 37 For details on individual parameters see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Parame ters on page 13 mum PEINT E User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 24 R amp S FSW K192 K193 Measurements and Result Display 3 Result Summary Frame Results Limit Min MER Data Pilot dB 90 69 90 69 MER Data dB 96 90 96 90 MER Pilot dB 90 08 90 08 0 0000 0 000012 0 0000 0 000001 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIG
110. dialog box select the Codeword Configuration tab 10 Select Frame Configuration 11 To let the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application determine the frame configuration automatically from the input signal set NCP Content to Auto from Signal and skip the next step To configure the frames manually set NCP Content to User Defined and con tinue with the next step 12 For each codeword in the signal that is the useful data transmitted to the same group of cable modems a Insert new line b Assign a profile which must have been configured see step 8 c Define either the first and total number of subcarriers the codeword is assigned to or the first and total number of symbols it is assigned to d Select OK and close the Frame Configuration dialog box 13 Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s center frequency 14 Select the Signal Capture button to define how much and which data to capture from the input signal 15 Select the Estimation Tracking button to define how the data channels are to be estimated and which distortions will be compensated for 16 Select the Demodulation button to activate automatic detection of continuous pilots and frames and to decode codewords during demodulation 17 Select the Evaluation Range softkey to configure a specific number of frames as the basis for statistical evaluation in the Result Summary Enable the
111. du 257 e CCDF Complementary Cumulative Distribution 258 10 9 4 1 Constellation This measurement represents the complex constellation points for the currently selected frame as and data Each and point is returned in floating point format Data is returned as a repeating array of interleaved and Q data in groups of selected carriers per OFDM Symbol until all the and Q data for the analyzed OFDM Symbols is exhausted The following selections are possible Retrieving Results All symbols SENS SYMB SELect ALL see SENSe SYMBol SELect on page 225 all subcarriers SENS SUBC SEL ALL SENSe SUBCarrier SELect on page 224 Number of subcarriers Nee pairs of and data per OFDM Symbol OFDM Symbol 0 loo 10 1 Q0 1 Gom OFDM Symbol 1 l4 142 012 Qu net OFDM Symbol 127 1127 0 Qi 1127 1 5 1427 Nf Q2 One symbol only SENS SYMB SEL x See SENSe SYMBol SELect on page 225 all subcarriers SENS SUBC SEL ALL SENSe SUBCarrier SELect on page 224 Number of subcarriers Nee pairs of and data for selected OFDM Symbol x lo Ix 1 Qx 1 seil Qs net All symbols SENS SYMB SELect ALL see SENSe SYMBol SELect on page 225 one subcarrier SENS SUBC SEL lt y gt SENSe SUBCarrier SELect on page 224 One p
112. fixed sample rate of 102 4 MHz is used Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Example TRAC IQ SRAT Usage Query only Manual operation See Sample Rate on page 99 10 5 5 10 5 5 1 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Configuring Triggered Measurements The following commands are required to configure a triggered measurement in a remote environment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 5 3 4 Trigger Settings on page 91 The OPC command should be used after commands that retrieve data so that subse quent commands to change the selected trigger source are held off until after the sweep is completed and the data has been returned e Configuring the Triggering 4 0 4 201 e Configuring the Tigger Obltpul une ertet er enero 206 Configuring the Triggering Conditions The following commands are required to configure a triggered measurement TRIGSger SEQuence BBPowerHOBbuolf ced an tenere 201 TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe 2 2 titre N ARE ca 202 TRIGSer SEQuence E HOLDON TIME 202 TRIGSer SEQuence I FPowerbOfDolt 21 a a a reete 202 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYS Teresis 2 2 11 ertt APT 202 TRIGger SEQuence EEVel BBPOWO
113. for DC input voltage Amplification To optimize the signal to noise ratio of the measurement for low signal levels the sig nal level in the R amp S FSW should be as high as possible but without introducing com pression clipping or overload Provide for early amplification by the preamplifier and a low attenuation Impedance When measuring in a 75 system connect an external matching pad to the RF input and adapt the reference impedance for power results The insertion loss is compensa ted for numerically Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function 5 Configuration 5 1 Access MODE gt Docsis 3 1 The default DOCSIS 3 1 I Q measurement captures the I Q data from the DOCSIS 3 1 signal and determines various characteristic signal parameters such as the modulation accuracy spectrum flatness center frequency tolerance and symbol clock tolerance in just one measurement see chapter 3 Measurements and Result Display on page 13 Other parameters specified in the DOCSIS 3 1 standard must be determined in sepa rate measurements see chapter 5 4 Frequency Sweep Measurements on page 119 The settings required to configure each of these measurements are described here e Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer 46 LIE ovas 47 e DOCSIS 3 1 1 Measurement Modulation
114. gt P 184 READ zc 184 SENSeJTPMETerspsDOYOIBESTATS oer orte ette a Eten 184 lt gt 1 2 1 1 2242 41 04 110 185 SENSE PME Terp FREQUEN x datu 185 gt 185 lt 186 lt gt 186 lt gt 5 187 SENSeJPMETersps3ROFPFsel a a E E 187 SENSeJPMETersp S TA Te repone haud 187 SENSeTPMETer psUPDale STAT corteo read teo e cett en Petite pete ttes 188 lt gt lt gt C 188 UNIT eg PMETEFSpSPOWSIERATIO doceas ea aee xen ie 188 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy CALibration PMETer lt p gt ZERO AUTO ONCE This commands starts to zero the power sensor Note that you have to disconnect the signals from
115. gt 1 200 index in the Excluded Subcarrier Assignment table Parameters lt Subcarrier gt integer Subcarrier number Range 1 to 2047 2k 4095 4k Example CONFigure US CHANnel ESUB2 SUBCarrier SET 301 302 Manual operation See Subcarrier Set on page 70 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy CONFigure US CHANnel ESUB lt i gt SUBCarrier STARt lt SubcarrierStart gt Defines the first excluded subcarrier in a series of subcarriers in the Excluded Subcar rier Assignment table Suffix lt i gt 1 200 index in the Excluded Subcarrier Assignment table Parameters lt SubcarrierStop gt integer Subcarrier number Must be lower than the parameter used by CONFigure US CHANnel ESUB i SUBCarrier STOP on page 163 Range 1 to 2047 2k 4095 4k Manual operation See Subcarrier Range Start Increment Stop page 70 CONFigure US CHANnel ESUB lt i gt SUBCarrier STOP lt SubcarrierStop gt Defines the last excluded subcarrier in a series of subcarriers in the Excluded Subcar rier Assignment table Suffix lt i gt 1 200 index in the Excluded Subcarrier Assignment table Parameters lt SubcarrierStop gt integer Subcarrier number Must be higher than the parameter used by CONFigure US CHANnel ESUB i SUBCarrier STARt on page 163 Range 1 to 2047 2k 4095 4k Manual operation See Subcarrier Range Start Increment Stop on page 70
116. however only frames in the current capture buffer can be analyzed and displayed indi vidually 4 3 DOCSIS 3 1 Upstream Signal Processing Upstream DOCSIS 3 1 signals are used to transmit data from numerous individual cable modems CMs to the cable modem termination system CMTS Signal process ing in the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application is similar to processing downstream sig nals as described in chapter 4 2 DOCSIS 3 1 Downstream Signal Processing on page 31 The main differences for upstream signals are described here Minislots and transmission profiles According to the DOCSIS 3 1 specification 2 minislots are defined as follows The upstream spectrum is divided into groups of subcarriers called minislots Minislots have dedicated subcarriers of which all data subcarriers have the same modulation order bit loading A CM is allocated to transmit one or more minislots in a transmis sion burst The modulation order of a minislot as well as the pilot pattern to use may change between different transmission bursts and are determined by a transmission profile This allows bit loading to vary across the spectrum Pilots complementary pilots data subcarriers Each minislot is comprised of pilots complementary pilots and data subcarriers Sub carriers that are not used for data or pilots are set to zero Pilots are subcarriers that do not carry data but encode a pre defined BPSK symbol known to the receiver Pil
117. in chapter 3 1 DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement on page 13 1941 118 EN 151 e Configuring the Data Input and Output ocn tette 172 e Frontend 193 ibus 198 Configuring Triggered 22 000202 000 1 6 aita 201 e Tracking and Channel Estimation esr tee edere vez 208 e DeomodgBlatlloii ecce td on ERR 209 Evaluation Exp etui La Rp rne ed ERE Urna 211 Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal e OFDM Downstream Channel 0 2 011 151 e OFDM Upstream Channel 156 e Continuous Pilots and Excluded Subcarrier 158 e Profile Configuration and Modulation Subcarrier Assignment Downstream 164 Profile Configuration Upstreaim cet re teens 168 e Codeword Frame Configuration 169 OFDM Downstream Channel Description GON Figure GIANG ete eruere Feat N ER aree 151 CON tam ue serai 152 GONFigure CHANnelROPFE 2 22 2 ac
118. into consideration for the statistical evaluation maximally the number of frames detected in the current capture buffer If disabled all detected frames the current capture buffer are considered Parameters lt Value gt RST 1 Example SENS FRAM COUN STAT ON SENS FRAM COUN 10 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy Manual operation See Frame Statistic Count Number of Frames to Analyze on page 107 SENSe FRAMe COUNt STATe lt State gt If the statistic count is enabled the specified number of frames is taken into considera tion for the statistical evaluation maximally the number of frames detected in the cur rent capture buffer If disabled all detected frames in the current capture buffer are considered Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SENS FRAM COUN STAT SENS FRAM COUN 10 Manual operation See Frame Statistic Count Number of Frames to Analyze on page 107 SENSe FRAMe SELect lt Value gt If single frame evaluation is enabled see SENSe FRAMe SELect STATe on page 214 the specified frame number is evaluated in all graphical and numeric result displays If single frame evaluation is disabled the first frame to be detected in the capture buf fer frame 0 is automatically selected for evaluation The result displays are updated to show the results for the new evaluation range The
119. lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO FIXed RANGe on page 226 the minimum defines the fixed lower limit Suffix n 1 n lt gt 1 n Parameters Min Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL MIN 20 Manual operation See Minimum Maximum on page 117 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision lt Multiple gt lt Multiple gt Determines the values shown for each division on the y axis in the specified window One or more multiples of 10 can be selected The R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application then selects the optimal scaling from the selected values For details see Scaling per division on page 117 Parameters Multiple 1 0 2 0 2 5 5 0 If enabled each division the y axis displays the selected mul tiple of 10 RST 1 0 5 0 Example DISP WIND TRAC Y SCAL PDIV 2 0 2 5 Multiples of 2 0 10 or multiples of 2 5 10 are displayed on the y axis Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Configuring the Result Display Manual operation See Scaling per division on page 117 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe UNIT This command queries the unit currently configured for the y axis in the specified win dow The suffix lt t gt is ignored as only one trace is available Return values lt Unit gt Possible values depend on the type of result display Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL UNIT Usage Que
120. of the measured values e g external mixer or trigger settings This information is dis User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 11 Understanding the Display Information played only when applicable for the current measurement For details see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information 2 Magnitude Capture 745 Fig 2 1 Window title bar information in the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application 1 Window number 2 Window type 3 Trace color 4 Trace number 5 Trace mode Diagram footer information The diagram footer beneath the diagram contains the following information depend ing on the evaluation Status bar information Global instrument settings the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram Furthermore the progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement 3 Measurements and Result Display The R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application provides several different measurements in order to determine the parameters described by the DOCSIS 3 1 specifications DOCSIS 3 1 1 13 e Frequency Sweep 27 3 1 DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Access Overview gt Select Measurement gt Modulation Accuracy or MEAS gt Se
121. on page 209 Auto Detection NCP Content For each new codeword that starts in a frame the first subcarrier and the number of subcarriers in total for the codeword is provided as a Next Codeword Pointer NCP The contents of the NCP can be configured manually or detected automatically by the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application If Auto from Signal is selected the position of the codewords NCP content are detected in the signal automatically during demodulation The entire table is filled auto matically If User Defined is selected the frames must be configured manually in the Code word Frame Configuration table Remote command SENSe DEMod NCP AUTO on page 211 Codewords Determines whether codewords are decoded or not DOCSIS 3 1 I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy If the codewords are not decoded calculation time decreases however in this case codeword error bits are not evaluated in the Signal Content Detailed on page 25 dis play Remote command SENSe DEMod DECode CODewords on page 210 Bitstream Determines which bits of the data stream are decoded and then displayed in a Bit stream result display if activated see Bitstream downstream only on page 17 Info Bits Decoded Payload Data Default Only the bits containing the actual information the payload bits are decoded and displayed Raw Bits Bits mapped to QAM constellation points undecoded Raw Bits Descrambled Bits ma
122. one timing adjustment is performed resulting in phase ramp across subcarriers PEQ Upstream only Partial Equalization Partial equalization according to the definition in the standardiza tion document ATP TC 1409 4 Procedure 3 1 The partial equal izer is configured such that it does not correct components of the cable modem s impulse response that are longer than 200 ns RST DOCSis downstream EMER upstream Example CHAN EST OFF Manual operation See Channel Estimation on page 102 SENSe TRACking PHASe State Activates or deactivates the compensation for phase drifts If activated the measure ment results are compensated for phase drifts on a per symbol basis 10 5 7 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example SENS TRAC PHAS ON Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Phase Tracking downstream only on page 103 SENSe TRACking TIME lt State gt Activates or deactivates the compensation for timing drift If activated the measure ment results are compensated for timing error on a per symbol basis Parameters lt State gt OFF 0 1 RST 0 Example SENS TRAC TIME ON Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation
123. power gt lt peak power gt lt crest factor gt Example CALC STAT RES2 ALL Reads out the three measurement results of trace 2 Example of answer string 5 56 19 25 13 69 i e mean power 5 56 dBm peak power 19 25 dBm crest factor 13 69 dB Usage Query only Manual operation See CCDF on page 28 Retrieving Results 10 9 3 Retrieving Trace Results The following commands describe how to retrieve the trace data from the DOCSIS 3 1 measurement Modulation Accuracy The traces for frequency sweep measurements are identical to those in the Spectrum application FORMAI DATA racun A nus tcp DM 253 253 A E 254 TRACIO DATA MEMON 254 FORMat DATA lt Format gt This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R amp S FSW to the controlling computer Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW automatically recognizes the data it receives regardless of the format Parameters lt Format gt ASCii ASCii format separated by commas This format is almost always suitable regardless of the actual data format However the data is not as compact as other for mats may be REAL 32 32 bit IEEE 754 floating point numbers in the definite length block format In
124. samples Example SWE LENG Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Usage Query only Manual operation See Number of Samples on page 100 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy SENSe SWEep TIME lt Time gt Defines or queries the duration and therefore the amount of data to be captured dur ing one measurement The maximum capture time depends on the specified see CONFigure CHANnel NFFT on page 152 Parameters Time Range Os to 4K mode 6 ms 8K mode 12 ms Default unit S Example SWE TIME 0 001 Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Capture Time on page 100 TRACe IQ BWIDth Queries the currently used analysis bandwidth For DOCSIS 3 1 downstream measurements a fixed bandwidth of 192 0 MHz is used For DOCSIS 3 1 upstream measurements a fixed bandwidth of 96 0 MHz is used Example TRAC IQ BWID Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Usage Query only Manual operation See Analysis Bandwidth ABW on page 99 TRACe IQ SRATe Queries the currently used sample rate For DOCSIS 3 1 downstream measurements a fixed sample rate of 204 8 MHz is used For DOCSIS 3 1 upstream measurements a
125. subsequent zoom windows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF rrr User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 266 Status Registers Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 129 See Restore Original Display on page 129 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 129 10 11 Status Registers The R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application uses the standard status registers of the R amp S FSW depending on the measurement type However some registers are used differently Only those differences are described in the following sections For details on the common R amp S FSW status registers refer to the description of remote control basics in the R amp S FSW User Manual 2 RST does not influence the status registers The STATus QUEStionable SYNC 2 402 040 02 267 Querying the Status Registers ssssessssseeeeee eee 268 10 11 1 The STATus QUEStionable SYNC Register The STATus QUEStionable SYNC register contains application specific information about synchronization errors or errors during pilot symbol detection If any errors occur in this register the status bit 11 in the STATus QUEStionable register is set to 1 Each active channel uses a separate STATus QUEStionable SYNC register Thus if o the status bit 11 in the STATus QUEStionable register indicates an error the error may have occurred in any of the channel specific STAT
126. symbols Excluded subcarriers are not used to transmit data ina DOCSIS 3 1 channel This may be due to poor transmission conditions use by other transmission channels or for other reasons Such carriers are blocked for all symbols of the channel The Physical Link Channel PLC is located at the same position in each OFDM sym bol and consists of several consecutive subcarriers It contains general transmission information such as the FFT size number of subcarriers and spacing size used for transmission as well as a preamble which contains a defined pattern and is required to synchronize the symbols The preamble of the PLC is BPSK modulated while the PLC data is always transmitted using 16 QAM modulation The information in the PLC can be used by the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application to determine several of the signal description parameters described above automatically The position of the PLC itself can also be detected by the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application automatically DOCSIS 3 1 Downstream Signal Processing Codewords logical subcarriers frames and NCPs The useful data that is to be transmitted to the same group of cable modems is sum marized into blocks The blocks are extended by additional bits for forword error cor rection which allow transmission errors to be detected and corrected by the receiver Such an encoded data block which may vary in size is referred to as a codeword The subcarriers for a single symb
127. tee tr lt 109 Result displays Bitstream Configuration remote Configuring Constellation erede meiner res BITE Te Evaluated data m Group Del y eterne nee reote rrt Magnitude Capture Marker table 20 30 MER vS Camer scianie fiiar iaa 20 MER VS Symbol 21 MER vs Symbol X Carrier Peak list oie 90 Power Spectrum tre ptr Ene 24 Power vs Galtier 2 22 Power Symbol X Carrier 23 Result Summary 24 29 Result Summary items 2 109 Signal Content Detailed 25 Signal Content Summary 2 25 Spectrum Flatlhess 26 Result Summary Evaluation Method oe generis 29 Items to display entente metre 109 Result display 24 29 MACE mE 255 Results untir 13 E 258 Constellation vs symbol 255 Data format remote 253 263 264 Evaluating eere 122 Exporting 31239 Group delay Meee 256 Magnitude Capture 255 256 MER VS Symbol 257 Numeric remote rende eer 237 Power spectrum Power vs Carrier
128. the Spectrum application the format setting REAL is used for the binary transmission of trace data For I Q data 8 bytes per sample are returned for this format set ting RST ASCII Example FORM REAL 32 Usage SCPI confirmed TRACe lt n gt DATA lt ResultType gt This command queries current trace data and measurement results from the selected window For details see chapter 10 9 4 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 255 Query parameters lt ResultType gt Selects the type of result to be returned TRACE1 TRACE6 Returns the trace data for the corresponding trace For DOCSIS 3 1 I Q measurements only TRACE1 is available Retrieving Results Return values lt TraceData gt For I Q data traces the results depend on the evaluation method window type selected for the current window see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 216 The results for the various win dow types are described in chapter 10 9 4 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 255 For RF data traces the trace data consists of a list of 1001 power levels that have been measured The unit depends on the measurement and on the unit you have currently set Example DISP WIND2 SEL TRAC TRACE3 Queries the data of trace 3 in window 2 Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Usage Query only Manual
129. the bottom or right Usage Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window in the active measure ment channel Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Return values Windowlndex Index number of the window Example LAY WIND IDEN 2 Queries the index of the result display named 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display in the active measurement channel Configuring the Result Display Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Example LAY REM 2 Removes the result display the window named 2 Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window in the active measurement channel while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows
130. the marker table Manual operation See Marker Table Display on page 128 Trace Export FORMSUDENXPOIUDSEPAaIO 263 FORMatDEXPotI tHERADEE 1 c a 263 FORMat DEXPOIUTRA QDDBS uii ec er ie a pner unen ae nna na n Ra naa Y Enna ad kiniad iranian 264 MMEMobory STORSESITSCTRAQR icon et trader eraut c veneto vrbe dd E eo EE ede 264 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format Parameters lt Separator gt COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator Manual operation See Decimal Separator on page 123 FORMat DEXPort HEADer lt State gt If enabled additional instrument and measurement settings are included in the header of the export file for result data If disabled only the pure result data from the selected traces and tables is exported Parameters State OFF 0 1 RST 1 Usage SCPI confirmed Analysis Manual operation See Include Instrument Measurement Settings on page 123 FORMat DEXPort TRACes lt Selection gt This command selects the data to be included in a data export file s
131. the power sensor input before you start to zero the power sensor Otherwise results are invalid Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters ONCE Example CAL PMET2 ZERO AUTO ONCE WAI Starts zeroing the power sensor 2 and delays the execution of further commands until zeroing is concluded Usage Event Manual operation See Zeroing Power Sensor on page 82 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude lt RefValue gt This command defines the reference value for relative measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Parameters lt RefValue gt Range 200 dBm to 200 dBm RST 0 Example CALC PMET2 REL 30 Sets the reference value for relative measurements to 30 dBm for power sensor 2 Manual operation See Reference Value on page 83 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE This command sets the current measurement result as the reference level for relative measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters ONCE Example CALC PMET2 REL AUTO ONCE Takes the current measurement value as reference value for rel ative measurements for power sensor 2 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas gt Ref on page 83 CALCula
132. to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt PRBSTestState gt State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt SampleRateType gt 0 Maximum sample rate is displayed 1 Current sample rate is displayed lt FullScaleLevel gt The level dBm that should correspond to an sample with the magnitude 1 if transferred from connected device If not available 1 ONAN not a number is returned Example INP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMW200A 101190 BBMM 1 OUT 100000000 200000000 Passed Passed 1 1 4QNAN Manual operation See Connected Instrument on page 77 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO State If enabled the digital input full scale level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device if available This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband interface is installed Parameters State OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 77 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling State If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat ically if the full scale level changes This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level on page 77 INPut DIQ
133. to the table and closes the dialog box Cancel Closes the dialog box without saving the changes Input Output and Frontend Settings Access Overview 2 Input Frontend or INPUT OUTPUT The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals Importing and Exporting I Q Data The I Q data to be analyzed for DOCSIS 3 1 can not only be captured by the DOCSIS 3 1 application itself it can also be imported to the application provided it has the correct format Furthermore the analyzed data from the DOCSIS 3 1 applica tion can be exported for further analysis in external applications See chapter 7 1 Import Export Functions on page 130 Frequency and amplitude settings are available to configure the frontend of the R amp S FSW For more information on the use and effects of these settings see chapter 4 5 Pre paring the R amp S FSW for the Expected Input Signal Frontend Parameters on page 44 e Input Source SetHligs ihe iret bn eee 74 LEE i o D 80 eoo eno den de rete dre del e diee e td mr du da 84 de oACIHUP SEM iin atid 87 e Amplitude Setlihgs citu 88 5 3 3 1 DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Input Source Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input
134. used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window the new win dow is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow Configuring the Result Display lt WindowType gt text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Usage Query only Manual operation See Bitstream downstream only on page 17 See Constellation on page 18 See Group Delay on page 19 See Magnitude Capture on page 19 See Marker Table on page 20 See MER vs Carrier on page 20 See MER vs Symbol on page 21 See MER vs Symbol X Carrier on page 22 See Power vs Carrier upstream only on page 22 See Power vs Symbol X Carrier on page 23 See Power Spectrum on page 24 See Result Summary on page 24 See Signal Content Detailed on page 25 See Signal Content Summary on page 25 See Spectrum Flatness on pa
135. values lt Object gt ALL ZEROBIT BPSK QPSK QAM16 64 128 QAM256 QAM512 QAM1024 QAM2048 QAM4096 QAM8192 QAM16384 Information type ALL All information types Pilots PLCData Downstream only PLC Data PLCPreamble Downstream only PLC Preamble NCPA Downstream only NCP All A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Downstream only Codeword A P CPILots Upstream only Complementary Pilots PROFile Upstream only Current profile Example OBJ SEL B Manual operation See Constellation on page 18 See Object on page 111 SENSe SUBCarrier SELect lt EvalRange gt Defines the evaluation range for the Constellation diagram Parameters lt EvalRange gt numeric value between 0 and 8191 The constellation diagram is restricted to the specified subcar rier ALL The Constellation diagram is displayed for all configured or detected subcarriers RST ALL Example SUBC SEL 7 Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Constellation on page 18 See Subcarrier on page 112 10 7 4 Configuring the Result Display SENSe SYMBol SELect lt EvalRange gt Defines the evaluation range for the Constellation diagram Parameters lt EvalRange gt numeric value between 0 and 127 The constellation diagram is restricted to the specified symbol ALL The Conste
136. versions are available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz web site at www rohde schwarz com appnote 1 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation 1 3 1 Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics 1 3 2 1 3 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation Convention Description Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating
137. 0 Ht Subcarriers Fig 4 5 DOCSIS 3 1 OFDMA frame structure for upstream transmission Mapping data and profiles to minislots The order of data bits within a minislot is described in the DOCSIS 3 1 specification 2 The useful data codewords are mapped into minislots prior to time and frequency interleaving using only contiguous subcarriers There are no subcarrier exclusions or unused subcarriers within a minislot The data is filled across all symbol periods sub carrier by subcarrier transmitted symbol period by symbol period with complementary pilots filled inline data subcarriers within one minislot use the same modulation Different minislots may use different modulation types R amp S FSW K192 K193 Measurement Basics 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 2 4 4 3 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals RF Input Protection The RF input connector of the R amp S FSW must be protected against signal levels that exceed the ranges specified in the data sheet Therefore the R amp S FSW is equipped with an overload protection mechanism This mechanism becomes active as soon as the power at the input mixer exceeds the specified limit It ensures that the connection between RF input and input mixer is cut off When the overload protection is activated an error message is displayed in the st
138. 0 2 5 5 0 1 Magnitude Capture RF 2 Automatic Grid 222222 115 PUTO MOUE 115 Auto Fb 00 PA Ver eds 116 Hysteresis Interval 116 Minimums cedo eet 117 117 NUMBER Of DIVISION T 117 Scaling per GIVISION 117 Automatic Grid Scaling Activates or deactivates automatic scaling of the y axis for the specified trace display If enabled the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application automatically scales the y axis to best fit the measurement results If disabled the y axis is scaled according to the specified Minimum Maximum and Number of Divisions Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO on page 225 Auto Mode Determines which algorithm is used to determine whether the y axis requires automatic rescaling User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 115 DOCSIS 3 111 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Hysteresis If the minimum and or maximum values of the current measurement exceed a specific value range hysteresis interval the axis is rescaled The hysteresis interval is defined as a percentage of the curre
139. 03 VQ Power remote esee 204 IF Power remote eee ete eet 203 RF Power remote 2 erdt ated 204 Trigger source s93 POWER siririna 94 Digital IQ reden ete 94 External T Free RUM pU 93 VO POWER ES 95 IF Power 95 Power Sensor 96 RF Power 95 MIS 96 Troubleshooting Input overload rtr etre 172 U Units Power sensor Reference level eet editors Updating Isesult display heh ener 101 Upstream Signal descriptlon rette rns 65 Userimantials eet td ah toos ertt de 6 V Video e 43 a via ade 85 192 Window title bar information eese 12 Windows Adding remote Closing remote Configuring Layout remote Maximizing remote cene 215 Queryirig remote tante nenne 218 Replacing remote 219 Splitting remote 4 215 Types remote rient te Pec Hr rhe Peters 216 X X value 126 Y Y maximum Y minimum feli 117 Y value Market 2 2 127 YIG preselector Activating Deactivating 2 2 76 Activating Deactivating remote 173 2 Zeroing POWGErSENSOM rrr rra pene E Ede 82 Zooming Activating remote cci reiecta 265 Are
140. 1 10400 191 ODTPUUIFESOUGa ren 192 2 ee EYE YR AE eX 192 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce lt State gt This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled NOISE SOURCE CONTROL on the R amp S FSW on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 86 OUTPut IF SOURce Source Defines the type of signal available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD or IF OUT 2 GHZ con nector of the R amp S FSW For restrictions and more information see chapter 4 4 4 IF and Video Signal Output on page 43 Parameters lt Source gt IF The measured IF value is available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector The frequency at which the IF value is provided is defined using the OUTPut IF IFFRequency command IF2 The measured IF value is available at the IF OUT 2 GHZ output connector at a frequency of 2 GHz This setting is only available if the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector or the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is available VIDeo The displayed video signal i e the filtered and detected IF sig nal 200mV is available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD output con nect
141. 10dB Manual operation See Shifting the Display Offset on page 89 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF input If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 90 INPut ATTenuation AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S FSW determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly Parameters lt State gt OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 90 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF se
142. 127 MER 127 3 MER 27 10 9 4 7 Power vs Carrier Upstream only Returns one power value per carrier Nee values for the currently selected frame The power unit depends on the CALCulatecn UNIT POWer setting 10 9 4 8 Power vs Symbol X Carrier Returns the power value for each subcarrier for one symbol at a time 128 Nee values for the currently selected frame The power unit depends on the CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer setting 1 4 P 127 2 27 3 lt lt 27 1 10 9 4 9 Power Spectrum Returns one power density value in power Hz for each subcarrier values for the currently selected frame The power unit depends on the CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer setting 10 9 4 10 Spectrum Flatness The spectrum flatness evaluation returns one relative power value in dB per subcar rier values for the currently selected frame Supported data formats FORMat DATA ASCiiJREAL 10 9 4 11 10 9 5 Retrieving Results CCDF Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function The length of the results varies up to a maximum of 201 data points is returned fol lowing a data count value The first value in the return data represents the quantity of probability values that follow Each of the potential 201 data points is returned as a probability value and represents the total number of samples that are equal to or exceed the curren
143. 2 5 Marker Table Wnd Type Ref X value Y value Z value l 13 16 GHz 67 73 dB 0 0 Hz 0 0 dB Carrier 1900 Symbol 20 Carrier 1900 Symbol 20 103 84 dB 49 24 dBm Tip To navigate within long marker tables simply scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 216 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 252 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 261 Marker Peak List The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum or time domain How many peaks are displayed can be defined as well as the sort order In addition the detected peaks can be indicated in the diagram The peak list can also be exported to a file for analysis in an external application 2 Marker Peak List Stimulus Tip To navigate within long marker peak lists simply scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PERAK see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 216 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X page 252 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 261 User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 30 4 4 1 4 2 DOCSIS 3 1 Characteristics Measurement Basics Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in DOCSIS 3 1 mea surements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration set tings
144. 2 Common suffixes for frequency sweep measurements Suffix Value range Description lt n gt 1 16 Window lt t gt 1 6 lt gt 1 16 Marker lt k gt 1 8 Limit line 10 2 Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instru ment or software They operate its functions setting commands or events and request information query commands Some commands can only be used in one way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the com mands can be used for settings and queries The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or more parameters To use a command as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parame ters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another Only the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For a more complete description refer to the User Manual of the R amp S FSW Remote command examples Note that some remote command examples mentioned in this general introduction may not be supported by this particular application 10 2 1 Con
145. 250 CALOCulate n LIMit SUMMary MERData MINimum RESUIt esee 250 lt gt 1 1 2 7 4 2 0 250 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit SUMMary CERRor MAXimum RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit SUMMary CERRor AVERage RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit SUMMary FERRor MAXimum RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit SUMMary FERRor AVERage RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit SUMMary MER MINimum RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit SUMMary MERData MINimum RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit SUMMary MERPilot MINimum RESult This command returns the result of the limit check for the specified parameter The limit value is defined by the DOCSIS 3 1 standard see chapter 10 9 1 3 Querying Limits on page 248 For details and an assignment of the parameters to the keywords see table 3 1 The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Return values lt LimitCheck gt PASS The defined limit for the parameter was not exceeded FAILED The defined limit for the parameter was exceeded Example CALC LIM SUMM MERP MIN RES Usage Query only Retrieving Results 10 9 2 Numeric Results for Frequency Sweep Measurements The following commands are required to retrieve the numeric results of the DOCSIS 3 1 frequency sweep measurements see chapter 3 2 Frequency Sweep Measurements on page 27 In the following c
146. 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Time gt Range Os to 1s Increment 100 ns RST 100 us Example PMET2 TRIG DTIMe 0 001 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HOLDoff lt Holdoff gt This command defines the trigger holdoff for external power triggers Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Holdoff gt Time period that has to pass between the trigger event and the start of the measurement in case another trigger event occurs Range 0s to 1s Increment 100 ns RST 0s Example PMET2 TRIG HOLD 0 1 Sets the holdoff time of the trigger to 100 ms Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 84 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis for external power triggers The hysteresis in dB is the value the input signal must stay below the IF power trigger level in order to allow a trigger to start the measurement Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range to 50 dB Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB Example PMET2 TRIG HYST 10 Sets the hysteresis of the trigger to 10 dB Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 84 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger LEVel Level This command defines the trigger level for external power triggers This command requires the use of an R amp S NRP Z81 power sensor Suffix lt p gt
147. 6 650 665 750 763 771 822 832 841 Tip to configure series of subcarriers identically use the Subcarrier Range Start Increment Stop settings Remote command CONFigure US CHANnel ESUB lt i gt SUBCarrier SET on page 162 Add Subcarrier Set Adds a new entry to the left of the currently selected entry Remove Subcarrier Set Removes the currently selected entry Inserting a line Inserts a new line in the table below the currently selected row Deleting a line Deletes the currently selected row Deleting the entire table Deletes all lines in the table except for the default PLC configuration Save Saves the changes to the table and closes the dialog box Cancel Closes the dialog box without saving the changes Profile Configuration Upstream Access Overview Signal Description Profile Configuration Profile Configu ration or MEAS CONFIG gt Signal Description gt Profile Configuration gt Profile Configu ration DOCSIS 3 111 Measurement Modulation Accuracy a ons lode Erenn i Index Modulation Pilot Pattern Minislots r 1 10 T 3T Delete Modulation Delete All Modulations 8 Capture Time 8 ms Fig 5 8 Profile configuration for upstream DOCSIS 3 1 signals 72 72 Minislot Pilot n
148. CONFigure US CHANnel ESUB lt i gt SUBCarrier Queries the type of special subcarrier for upstream signals only excluded subcarriers are available Suffix lt gt 1 200 irrelevant Return values lt Type gt ESUB Subcarrier that cannot be used because another type of service is using the subcarrier s frequency or a permanent ingressor is present on the frequency Example CONF US CHAN ESUB SUBC TYPE 10 5 1 4 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Usage Query only Manual operation See Type on page 70 Profile Configuration and Modulation Subcarrier Assignment Downstream Useful commands for modulation subcarrier assignment described elsewhere CONFigure DS CHANnel NCP MODulation on page 153 Remote commands exclusive to profile configuration and modulation subcarrier assignment 0 lt gt 164 0 lt gt 164 CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig i SELect 1 icri iniiai ai 165 5 lt gt 5 165 0 lt gt 50 166 0
149. CSIS 3 1 downstream measurement The Overview not only shows the main measurement settings it also provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes The indicated signal flow shows which parameters affect which processing stage in the measurement Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel from input over processing to output and analysis by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview The available settings and functions in the Overview vary depending on the currently selected measurement For frequency sweep measurements see chapter 5 4 Fre quency Sweep Measurements on page 119 User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 49 DOCSIS 3 11 Measurement Modulation Accuracy For the DOCSIS 3 1 I Q measurement the Overview provides quick access to the following configuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Select Measurement See Select Measurement on page 50 2 Signal Description See chapter 5 3 2 Signal Description on page 51 3 Input Frontend See and chapter 5 3 3 Input Output and Frontend Settings on page 73 4 Trigger See chapter 5 3 4 Trigger Settings on page 91 5 Data Acquisition See chapter 5 3 5 Data Acquisition on page 98 6 Parameter Estimation and Tracking See chapter 5 3 7 Parameter Estimation and Tracking on page 102 7 Demodulation downstream only See chapter 5 3 8 Demodulation downstre
150. Ce IQ SRATe on page 200 Analysis Bandwidth ABW The bandwidth of the signal which is analyzed for the modulation accuracy measure ment For DOCSIS 3 1 downstream measurements a fixed bandwidth of 192 0 MHz is used For DOCSIS 3 1 upstream measurements a fixed bandwidth of 96 0 MHz is used Remote command TRACe IQ BWIDth on page 200 User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 99 DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Capture Time Specifies the duration and therefore the amount of data to be captured in the capture buffer If the capture time is too short demodulation will fail The capture time may not exceed 470 ms If the capture time is changed the Number of Samples is adapted according to the fol lowing equation Number of samples capture time sample rate Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME on page 200 Number of Samples The number of samples is indicated for reference only It is calculated from the Capture Time and the Sample Rate according to the following equation Number of samples capture time sample rate The maximum number of samples for downstream is thus 96 256 000 The maximum number of samples for upstream is thus 48 128 000 Remote command SENSe SWEep LENGth on page 199 Swap I Q Activates or deactivates the inverted I Q modulation If the and Q parts of the signal from the DUT are interchanged the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it On and s
151. ENSe FRAMe COUNt STATe on page 213 SENSe FRAMe COUNt on page 212 Excluding Subcarriers from MER Calculation Up to five specific subcarriers can be excluded from modulation error ratio MER cal culation Off Default subcarriers are included MER calculation DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Auto The specified Number of Excluded sc with the worst MER are auto matically excluded from MER calculation Up to five subcarriers can be eliminated automatically Note if you enter a value in Number of Excluded sc the setting is automatically set to Auto User Defined Up to five subcarriers defined in the set are excluded Note if you enter a value in the set of excluded subcarriers the set ting is automatically changed to User Defined Remote command CONFigure MEXC STATe on page 211 CONFigure MEXC SUBCarrier COUNt on page 212 Subcarrier Set Excluding Subcarriers from MER Calculation Specifies up to five subcarrier numbers to be excluded When you select the input field an edit dialog is displayed Enter the individual subcar rier numbers in the dialog selecting ENTER after each number To add further entry fields select Add on page 58 Remove Remote command CONFigure MEXC SUBCarrier SET on page 212 Add Subcarrier Set Excluding Subcarriers from MER Calculation Adds a new entry to the left of the currently selected entry R
152. H RSUM see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 216 Results FETCh SUMMary ALL on page 247 FETCh FRAMe COUNt on page 238 FETCh FRAMe COUNt ALL on page 238 Signal Content Detailed This result display shows the serialized information from the list of NCPs and code words downstream or minislot sets upstream for the currently Selected Frame as indicated in the Magnitude Capture display For details on individual entries see chapter 3 1 2 Signal Content Information on page 14 3 Signal Content Detailed CW Symbol Index Start LDPC LDPC LDPC Bit Err Pre Bit Err Post CW Err Post BER Pre BER Post BLER Post Power Object Modulation dB dBm SC Iterations n a Pilots lt 59 24 n a n a n a n a n a PLC Preamble 3PSk 7 16 59 24 n a n a PLC Data 8 87 59 24 Note If the low density parity check LDPC results indicate no errors 70 the value is displayed green otherwise the value is red This allows you to detect errors at a glance Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SCD see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 216 Results FETCh SCDetailed ALL FORMatted on page 242 SENSe FRAMe SELect on page 213 Signal Content Summary This result display shows the summarized information for the NCPs and codewords in a specified number of frames or for a single namely the currently Selected Frame as indicated in the Magnitude Capture display Note This result display is n
153. IS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy 10 5 5 2 Configuring the Trigger Output The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW gt 206 OUTPuETRIGSerspont LBVel eese ere eto nt 206 OUTP TRICE PONOT YP eis corde tette aee ocupa sb rone 207 OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe MMediate 5 5 7 ett oorr repa odere pa e dad anda 207 OUTPUtTRIGger lt port gt PULSE 207 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection Direction This command selects the trigger direction for trigger ports that serve as an input as well as an output Suffix lt port gt Selects the used trigger port 2 trigger port 2 front panel 3 trigger port 3 rear panel Parameters lt Direction gt INPut Port works as an input OUTPut Port works as an output RST INPut Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 86 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel lt Level gt This command defines the level of the signal generated at the trigger output This command works only if you have selected a user defined output with OUTPut TRIGger port OTYPe Suffix port Selects the trigger port to which t
154. If the unit is missing the com mand uses the basic unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1 9 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead of a number you can also set numeric values with a text parameter in special cases MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is supported e DEF Defines the default value e UP DOWN Increases or decreases the numeric value by one step The step size depends on the setting In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding command Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quantities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of dig its after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1 9 In some cases numeric values may be returned as text Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 e NAN Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case of errors Boolean Boolean parameters represe
155. K30 NOISE Noise Phase Noise R amp S FSW K40 PNOISE Phase Noise Transient Analysis R amp S FSW K60 TA Transient Analysis VSA R amp S FSW K70 DDEM VSA 3GPP FDD BTS R amp S FSW K72 BWCD 3G FDD BTS 3GPP FDD UE R amp S FSW K73 MWCD 3G FDD UE TD SCDMA BTS R amp S FSW K76 BTDS TD SCDMA BTS TD SCDMA UE R amp S FSW K77 MTDS TD SCDMA UE cdma2000 BTS R amp S FSW K82 BC2K CDMA2000 BTS cdma2000 MS R amp S FSW K83 MC2K CDMA2000 MS 1xEV DO BTS R amp S FSW K84 BDO 1xEV DO BTS the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel Activating DOCSIS 3 1 Measurements Application lt ChannelType gt Default Channel Parameter 1xEV DO MS R amp S FSW K85 MDO 1xEV DO MS WLAN R amp S FSW K91 WLAN WLAN 802 11ad R amp S FSW K95 WIGIG 802 11ad LTE R amp S FSW K10x LTE LTE Real Time Spectrum R amp S FSW B160R RTIM Real Time Spectrum K160RE DOCSIS 3 1 R amp S FSW K192 193 DOCSis DOCSIS 3 1 the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel INSTrument REName lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command renames a measurement channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String cont
156. LAYout ADD WINDow on page 216 Results SENSe FRAMe SELect on page 213 TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 253 Power vs Symbol X Carrier Displays the power level per carrier and symbol for the currently Selected Frame as indicated in the Magnitude Capture display The symbols are displayed on the x axis the carriers are displayed on the y axis The power level is color coded and is indicated as a colored dot for each symbol and carrier The legend for the color coding is provi ded by a color bar at the top of the diagram The power unit depends on the Unit setting 4 Power vs Symb X Carrier ei Clrw Carrier Number Note In 3 dimensional result displays the marker position must be defined by its value on the x axis carrier and y axis symbol The parameter value Power is queried as the third dimension 2 SSS ee ee aa User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 23 R amp S FSW K192 K193 Measurements and Result Display eee E In this result display only a single normal marker is available Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PSC see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 216 Results SENSe FRAMe SELect on page 213 TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 253 Power Spectrum This result display shows the power density power Hz vs frequency values obtained using an FFT The evaluation is performed over the complete data in the current cap ture buffer without any correction or compensation The power unit
157. MM MER MIN RES Query the results for bitstream in byte format in frames 1 and 2 UNIT BITS BYTE FETC BITS ALL SENS FRAM SEL 2 FETC BITS ALL Exporting Captured I Q Data Store the captured I Q data to a file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar 10 12 2 Measurement 2 Determining the Occupied Bandwidth This example demonstrates how to determine the occupied bandwidth for the DOCSIS 3 1 channel Preparing the application Reset the instrument RST Activate a DOCSIS measurement channel named OBWMeasurement INST CRE NEW DOCS OBWMeasurement Select the OBW measurement CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL OBW 5535554 Performing the Measurement Stop continuous sweep INIT CONT OFF Set the number of sweeps to be performed to 100 SWE COUN 100 Start a new measurement with 100 sweeps and wait for the end INIT WAI f 222 Retrieving Results Query the occupied bandwidth CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBW Returning to DOCSIS 1 0 measurement Stop power OBW measurement CALC MARK FUNC POW STAT OFF References A Annex A 1 A 2 References The R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application and User Manual refer to the following docu ments 1 Data Over Cable Service Interface Specifications DOCSIS 3 1 MAC and Upper Layer Protocols Interface Specifi
158. NFigUre SDIRCCUON P 5 5 lt gt 0 9 5 5 lt gt 5 GONFigure US CHANnselI ESUB i SUBCarrier SET rrr enne 5 5 lt gt 5 5 5 5 lt gt 5 5 2 CONFigure US CHANnel ESUB lt i gt SUBCarrier 163 5 lt gt 168 5 lt gt 2 168 05 lt gt 169 GONFigure US GHANrSSYMBAIS rtt ratur iore PES 158 DIAGnostic SERVIGe NSQUEGS iecore n nere deve p 191 DISPlay FORMat DISPlay WINDowsn BITStream LAYOUL corrente DISPlayE WINDOWS SIZE iro DIS
159. PSK n a TERN pe 0 0 n a n a PLC Data 16 QAM 0 00 00 0 00e 00 3 Result Summary 4 Constellation Frame Results Mean Min 45 21 45 21 45 14 0 2245 0 0000 Measuring 72 1 Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 2 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 3 Diagram area with marker information 4 Detected symbols 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information depending on measurement application 6 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display Channel bar information In the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application the R amp S FSW shows the following settings Table 2 1 Information displayed in the channel bar in the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application Ref Level Reference level Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation Freq Center frequency for the RF signal Mode Nee mode 4K 8K Downstream Upstream Capture Time Measurement time for data acquisition SGL The sweep is set to single sweep mode Frames x of y z For statistical evaluation over frames x frames of totally required y frames have been analyzed so far z frames were analyzed in the most recent measurement 7 current capture buffer In addition the channel bar also displays information on instrument settings that affect the measurement results even though this is not immediately apparent from the display
160. Play WINDOW lt n gt DISPlay WINDow n lt gt 5 DISPlay WINDow n lt gt 5 2 DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis LOWer LOWer DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis LOWer UPPer DISPlay WINDow N TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis UPPer LOWer eese DISPlay WINDow N TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis UPPer UPPer esee DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO MEMory DEPTh essen lt gt lt gt 5 2 DISPlay WINDow n lt gt 5 1 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum 15 lt gt lt gt DISPlay WINDow n lt gt 5 DISPlay WINDow n lt gt 5 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet lt gt 7 lt 2 gt 266
161. R amp S FSW K192 K193 DOCSIS 3 1 OFDM Measurements User Manual AIL HOLT 1175 6490 02 04 E 2 e 5 bz 2 2 gt o 32 wn This manual applies to the following R amp S FSW models with firmware version 2 30 and higher R amp S9 FSWS 1312 8000 08 R amp S FSW13 1312 8000 13 R amp S FSW26 1312 8000K26 R amp S FSW43 1312 8000K43 R amp S FSW50 1312 8000 50 R amp S FSW67 1312 8000 67 R amp S FSW85 1312 8000 85 The following firmware options are described R amp S FSW K192 DOCSIS 3 1 OFDM Downstream Measurements 1325 4138 02 R amp S FSW K193 DOCSIS 3 1 OFDM Upstream Measurements 1325 4144 02 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 Email info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG DOCSIS is a registered trademark of the Cable Television Laboratories Inc Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9FSW is abbreviated as R amp S FSW R amp S FSW K192 K193 Contents 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 6 1 6 2 6 3 Contents PTAC Cr
162. RANGe UPPer lt Level gt Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that corresponds to an I Q sam ple with the magnitude 1 This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric value gt Range to 7 071 V RST 1V Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 77 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT Unit Defines the unit of the full scale level see Full Scale Level on page 77 The availa bility of units depends on the measurement application you are using This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters Level VOLT DBM DBPW WATT DBMV DBUV DBUA AMPere RST Volt Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 77 INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the optional Digital Baseband Interface see Input Sample Rate on page 77 Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 77 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO lt State gt If enabled the sample rate of the digital I Q input signal is set automatically by the con nected device This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed
163. RPilot AVERage FETCh SUMMary MERPilot MAXimum FETCh SUMMary MERPilot MINimum FETCh SUMMary PERRor AVERage FETCh SUMMary PERRor MAXimum FETCh SUMMary PERRor MINimum FETCh SUMMary POWer AVERage FETCh SUMMary POWer MAXimum FETCh SUMMary POWer MINimum FETCh SUMMary TFRame AVERage FETCh SUMMary TFRame MAXimum FETCh SUMMary TFRame MINimum FETCh SUMMary TPLC AVERage FETCh SUMMary TPLC MAXimum FETCh SUMMary TPLC MINimum FETCh SUMMary lt parameter gt AVERage MAXimum MINimum FETCh SUMMary ZBIT AVERage FETCh SUMMary ZBIT MAXimum FETCh SUMMary ZBIT MINimum Usage Query only Querying Limits The following commands are required to query the limits against which the individual parameter results are checked The limits are defined in the DOCSIS 3 1 standard lt gt 11 0 0000100000 0 248 lt gt 1 eerte 248 lt gt _1 249 lt gt _1 249 lt gt _1 14110
164. S 48 SWITCHING Attenuation Auto Electronic Manual Option Protective Protective remote 172 Audio signals Output remote Auto set from PLC AUuto Seltiligs cote Average count Power SENSO 83 Bandwidth MG WU 48 Tigger SoftKey 2 2 reperiet 94 Bitstream Dermodulatioli ion eec aco rette 105 Format Layout display re rr error hr thes 17 C Capture time ics desc retta rrr rr tee rt 100 CCDF Configuring applications 120 c 28 dala e eem en ciens 258 Center Trequericy 3t reco ict coerente cians 53 67 87 Arialog Baseband B71 nce 80 SOfIKGy ere re en cesi ner 53 67 87 Kip 88 Channel Estimating err tri en 208 Channel estimation Remote GOMO 208 Closing Channels remote scssi 146 Windows remota Je 218 221 Codewords DernodulatiQE 5 3 etie re 104 Complementary cumulative distribution function 566 e 28 Connectors IFIVIDEO DEMOD evite ren 85 Constellation Display settings trn rtr ee Modulatiol r
165. S CHANnel PCONfig i SUBCarrier STOP on page 167 Example CONF DS CHAN PCON2 SUBC STAR 10 Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Start Increment Stop on page 63 CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt SUBCarrier STOP lt SubcarrierStop gt Defines the last subcarrier in a series of subcarriers to be configured identically in the Modulation Subcarrier Assignment table for the currently selected profile 10 5 1 5 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Use the CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt SELect command to select pro file Suffix lt i gt 1 200 index in the Modulation Subcarrier Assignment table for the cur rently selected profile Parameters lt SubcarrierStop gt Range 1 to 2K mode 2047 4K mode 4095 Must be higher than the parameter used by CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig i SUBCarrier STARt on page 167 Example CONF DS CHAN PCON2 SUBC STOP 100 Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Start Increment Stop on page 63 Profile Configuration Upstream The following commands require option R amp S FSW K193 05 lt gt 168 05 lt
166. S FSW B320 320 MHz analysis bandwidth option Both R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 applications require a bandwidth extension option for 320 MHz The R amp S FSW K193 option for DOCSIS 3 1 upstream signals requires the new bandwidth extension hardware R amp S FSW B320 11325 4867 04 The R amp S FSW K192 option for DOCSIS 3 1 downstream signals requires either the option R amp S FSW B320 1313 7172 02 orthe new bandwidth extension hardware R amp S FSW B320 11325 4867 04 If the required options are not installed an error message is displayed and no mea surements can be performed with the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 applications Common Suffixes 10 Remote Commands for DOCSIS 3 1 Mea surements The following commands are required to perform measurements in the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application in a remote environment It is assumed that the R amp S FSW has already been set up for remote control in a net work as described in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note that basic tasks that are independant of the application are not described here For a description of such tasks see the R amp S FSW User Manual In particular this includes e Managing Settings and Results i e storing and loading settings and result data e Basic instrument configuration e g checking the system configuration customizing the screen layout or configuring networks and remote operation Using the common status registers After an introduction to SCPI commands
167. S 3 1 Signals 136 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 138 Remote Commands for DOCSIS 3 1 Measurements 139 Common SUTfIX6S cer 139 a ep 140 Activating DOCSIS 3 1 145 Selecting 149 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation 151 Configuring Frequency Sweep Measurements DOCSIS 3 1 Signals 214 Configuring the Result 215 Starting a Measurement ttti ener 232 R trieving Results inet enero 237 PAV ANY SIS E E N 259 Status Registers 267 Programming Examples for DOCSIS 3 1 Measurements 270 ANNEX 2 ea 276 BRE 276 Data File Format iq tar cc cceecceecceeseeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeneeceeseeeseeeesaeenenensaes 276 List of Remote Commands DOCSIS 3 1 282 ec 289 R amp S FSW K192 K193 Preface 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual
168. ST 1 Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Automatic Grid Scaling on page 115 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO FIXed RANGe lt AutoFixRange gt This command defines the use of fixed value limits Parameters lt AutoFixRange gt NONE LOWer UPPer NONE Both the upper and lower limits are determined by automatic scaling of the y axis LOWer The lower limit is fixed defined by DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe t Y SCALe MAXimum while the upper limit is determined by automatic scaling of the y axis UPPer The upper limit is fixed while the lower limit is determined by automatic scaling of the y axis Example DISP WIND1 TRAC Y AUTO FIX RANG LOW DISP WIND1 TRAC Y MIN OdBm Sets the lower limit of the y axis to a fixed value of 0 dBm Manual operation See Auto Fix Range on page 116 DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis _OWer UPPer lt Value gt For automatic scaling based on hysteresis this command defines the upper limit of the lower hysteresis interval If the minimum value in the current measurement exceeds this limit the y axis is rescaled automatically For details see Hysteresis Interval Upper Lower on page 116 Configuring the Result Display P
169. ST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Marker State on page 126 See Marker Type on page 127 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace the marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters Trace Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 Manual operation See Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 127 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 233 Return values lt Result gt Result at the marker position Analysis Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker Table on page 20 See CCDF on page 28 See Marker Peak List on page 30 See Y value on page 127 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y Symbol This command defines the po
170. Sequencer If activated sequential operation according to the selected Sequencer mode is started immediately Remote command SYSTem SEQuencer on page 236 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 235 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt on page 234 Sequencer Mode Defines how often which measurements are performed The currently selected mode softkey is highlighted blue During an active Sequencer process the selected mode softkey is highlighted orange Single Sequence Each measurement is performed once until all measurements in all active channels have been performed Continuous Sequence The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly in the same order until sequential operation is stopped This is the default Sequencer mode Remote command INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer MODE on page 235 Display Configuration Access Overview Display Config or MEAS gt Display Config 5 3 DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy The measurement results can be displayed using various evaluation methods All eval uation methods available for the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode Drag one or more evaluations to the display area and configure the layout as required Up to 16 evaluation methods can be displayed simultaneously in separate windows The DOCSIS 3 1 evaluation methods are described in c
171. Source or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config The input source determines which data the R amp S FSW will analyze e Radia Frequency bag ens 74 Digital VO Input 76 e Analog Baseband Ihp t Semrmigs cioe 78 Radio Frequency Input Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt Radio Frequency or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Radio Frequency The default input source for the R amp S FSW is Radio Frequency i e the signal at the RF INPUT connector of the R amp S FSW If no additional options are installed this is the only available input source Input Source Radio Frequency Input Coupling Impedance Direct Path High Pass Filter 1 to 3 GHz YIG Preselector Input Connector Radio Ea ec xeu Dudes 74 SOON NG EE 75 MP 75 Direct Pati 75 High Pass Filter 1 LEE pue te CE ERE eben cta 75 SSIS gt 76 Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remote command INPut SELect on page 174 DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current
172. Suffixes COMMON 139 Remote commands 141 Swap REMOTE ER 199 Sweep ADOMING iiiter t rere i ie aia 101 Configuration Softkey retten 101 T Time trigger Repetition interval Jnnt rte 96 M M 96 Timing Ire do M Timing error tracking Tolerance Parameters ehe eo proe prep ns 13 Traces Export format 123 Exporting x Results remote iiie etate 253 Tracking Phase drift Remote control Timing errors Trigger Configuration remote 201 Configuration softkey 91 Drop out tifrie nn rete rte trn 96 Drop out time Power sensor 2 84 External remote 204 External power 2 84 Holdoff 5 n agr Holdoff Power sensor 84 a EI 97 Hysteresis Power sensor 84 Level Power sensor 2 84 96 Oy 010 prea ree 86 97 POWGrSONSOM eere eerte dee e er EUER RO 84 SIODB 2 2 97 204 Slope Power sensor 84 Trigger leveli 96 External trigger remote 2
173. TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 2 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 86 DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy External Trigger 3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 86 Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 204 Baseband Power Trigger Source Trigger Source Settings Defines triggering on the baseband power for baseband input via the optional Digital Baseband Interface or the optional Analog Baseband interface For more information on the the Digital Baseband Interface or the Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW 1 Analyzer and 1 0 Input User Manual Remote command TRIG SOUR BBP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 204 Digital Trigger Source lt Trigger Source Settings For applications that process data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applica tions and only if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is available Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS connector In the selection list you must specify which general purpose bit GPO to GP5 will provide the trigger data Note If the
174. US CHAN SYMB 8 Manual operation See Symbols Per Frame K on page 69 10 5 1 3 Continuous Pilots and Excluded Subcarrier Assignment Useful commands for configuring continuous pilots described elsewhere SENSe DEMod CPILots AUTO on page 209 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy Remote commands exclusive to configuring continuous pilots and excluded subcarriers GONFigure DS CHANneE CPESsi COUNI aia uti iride tene one XR deret kh Rer ax 159 0 lt gt 50 159 9 5 lt gt 5 5 a aidaa 160 0 lt gt 50 160 5 5 lt gt 59 2 161 05 lt gt 50 161 CONFigure US CHANnel ESUBSIF COUN 162 0 lt gt 50 162 05 5 lt gt 50 5
175. Using the power sensor as an external 84 L External Trigger LeVel cccccscccccsscescssssssssssssesesesesecesssessseseeseseseseseseseseeceee 84 84 E dll asc at st sidan cesta ncaa 84 onn dt tian 84 84 State Switches the power measurement for all power sensors on or off Note that in addition to this general setting each power sensor can be activated or deactivated individually by the Select setting on each tab However the general setting overrides the individual settings Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt STATe on page 187 Continuous Value Update If activated the power sensor data is updated continuously during a sweep with a long sweep time and even after a single sweep has completed This function cannot be activated for individual sensors If the power sensor is being used as a trigger see Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 84 continuous update is not possible this setting is ignored Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt UPDate STATe on page 188 Select Selects the individual power sensor for usage if power measurement is generally acti vated State function The detected serial numbers of the power sensors connected to the instrument are
176. W the R amp S FSW can use a signal from an external device as a trigger to capture data Alter natively the internal trigger signal used by the R amp S FSW can be output for use by other connected devices Using the same trigger on several devices is useful to syn chronize the transmitted and received signals within a measurement For details on the connectors see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 42 444 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output External trigger as input If the trigger signal for the R amp S FSW is provided by an external device the trigger sig nal source must be connected to the R amp S FSW and the trigger source must be defined as External for the R amp S FSW Trigger output The R amp S FSW can provide output to another device either to pass on the internal trig ger signal or to indicate that the R amp S FSW itself is ready to trigger The trigger signal can be output by the R amp S FSW automatically or manually by the user If it is provided automatically a high signal is output when the R amp S FSW has trig gered due to a measurement start Device Triggered or when the R amp S FSW is ready to receive a trigger signal after a measurement start Trigger Armed Manual triggering If the trigger output signal is initiated manually the length and level high low of the trigger pulse is also user definable Note however that the trigger pulse level i
177. a Multiple mode remote Area remote 265 Deactivating 129 Multiple 2 rne rere 129 Multiple mode remote 266 REMOS eme 265 Restoring original display 21 129 Single mode gt 128 Single mode remole ncc 265
178. a in adjacent channels is removed by the filter This setting improves the signal to noise ratio and thus the MER results for signals with strong or a large number of adjacent channels However for some measurements information on the effects of adjacent channels on the measured signal may be of interest Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Parameters lt State gt OFF 0 1 ON 1 Adjacent channels are filtered OFF 0 Adjacent channels are not filtered RST 0 Manual operation See Filter Adjacent Channels downstream only on page 100 SENSe SWAPiq State This command defines whether or not the recorded pairs should be swapped 1 lt gt before being processed Swapping and inverts the sideband This is useful if the DUT interchanged the and parts of the signal then the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it Parameters State ON and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l OFF and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband j Q RST OFF Manual operation See Swap 1 0 on page 100 SENSe SWEep LENGth Queries the current record length that is the number of samples captured during the measurement The maximum number of samples depends on the specified see CONFigure CHANnel NFFT on page 152 Return values Record Length Range 0 to mode 1228800000 samples 8K mode 2457600000
179. ace setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace The trace deter mines which value the marker shows at the marker position If the marker was previ ously assigned to a different trace the marker remains on the previous frequency or time but indicates the value of the new trace The marker can also be assigned to the currently active trace using the Marker to Trace softkey in the Marker menu If a trace is turned off the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactiva ted Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe on page 261 All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 260 6 2 2 6 3 Zoom Functions General Marker Settings Access Overview gt Result Configuration gt Marker Settings or MKR gt Marker Config gt Marker Settings Markers Marker Settings Display Settings YS Marker Table 754 1728 2 Power Spectrum 5 Marker Table Display Defines how the marker information is displayed On Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram Off Displays the marker information within the diagram area Auto Default Up to two markers are displayed in the diagram area If more markers are active the marker table is displayed automatically Remote command DISPlay MTABle on page 263 Zoom Functions Access Zoom icons in toolbar
180. age 46 ABORT ccieacaita nada OTT 232 INITiate sm CONMIOAs Rar pe mee ric ui 233 INITiate sp CONTIBUDLHS dne nna 233 INE rate sns IMMeiale 234 REFISGSIi rici eo eria rti beris Pie be aede eats 234 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencerABO RE tiit itte etra EENE ATA X RD Ond 234 lt gt 5 235 INI Tiatesn SEQuerncerMODE 235 SYSTEM SEQUOGFRGBE erac ERR E A REN DEAE EE AAEE 236 ABORt This command aborts the measurement in the current measurement channel and resets the trigger system To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measure ment has been aborted successfully use the OPC or command after ABOR and before the next command For details see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer use the INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt command Note on blocked remote control programs If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel to the R amp S FSW is
181. aining the name of the channel you want to rename lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel this will cause an error Example INST REN IQAnalyzer2 IQAnalyzer3 Renames the channel with the name IQAnalyzer2 to IQAna lyzer3 Usage Setting only INSTrument SELect lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command activates a new measurement channel with the defined channel type or selects an existing measurement channel with the specified name See also INSTrument CREate NEW on page 145 For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 147 Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see table 10 3 DOCSis DOCSIS 3 1 option R amp S FSW K192 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel 10 4 Selecting a Measurement Example INST DOCS Activates a measurement channel for the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application INST DOCSIS Selects the measurement channel named DOCSIS for exam ple before executing further commands for that channel Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel Example INST Spe
182. air of and Q data for subcarrier y per OFDM Symbol OFDM Symbol 0 loy Qoy OFDM Symbol 1 l4 y OFDM Symbol 127 haz y Qi y One symbol only SENS SYMB SEL x See SENSe SYMBol SELect on page 225 one subcarrier SENS SUBC SEL y SENSe SUBCarrier SELect on page 224 One pair of and Q data for subcarrier y and selected OFDM Symbol x lcs y 10 9 4 2 Group Delay Returns one time deviation value per subcarrier 2 Nee values for the currently selected frame 10 9 4 3 Magnitude Capture Returns the magnitude for each measurement point in all measurements not only the current capture buffer The number of measurement points depends on the input sam ple rate and the capture time see Number of Samples on page 100 as well as the Frame Statistic Count Number of Frames to Analyze 10 9 4 4 MER vs Carrier Returns one modulation error ratio in dB or 96 per carrier Nee values for the cur rently selected frame Retrieving Results 10 9 4 5 MER vs Symbol Returns one modulation error ratio in dB or 96 per symbol 7128 values for the cur rently selected frame 10 9 4 6 vs Symbol X Carrier Returns the modulation error ratio in dB or 96 for each subcarrier for one symbol at a time 128 Nee values for the currently selected frame MER MER 2 MER 27 5
183. al measurement chan nel Note that in single measurement mode you can synchronize to the end of the mea surement with OPC or WAI In continuous measurement mode synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous measurement mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single measurement end synchronization If the measurement mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active see INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate page 235 the mode is only considered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Starting a Measurement Parameters lt State gt OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous measurement OFF 0 Single measurement RST 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the measurement mode to single measurement INIT CONT ON Switches the measurement mode to continuous measurement Manual operation See Continuous Sweep RUN CONT on page 101 INITiate lt n gt IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 101 INITiate lt n gt
184. aling with a fixed range see Auto Fix Range the minimum defines the fixed lower limit the maximum defines the fixed upper limit Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum on page 229 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum 230 Memory Depth For automatic scaling based on memory see Auto Mode on page 115 this value defines the number lt x gt of previous results to be considered when determining if rescaling is required The minimum and maximum value of each measurement are added to the memory After lt x gt measurements the oldest results in the memory are overwritten by each new measurement If the maximum value in the current measurement exceeds the maximum of the lt x gt previous results and the upper limit is not fixed the y axis is rescaled If the minimum value in the current measurement drops below the minimum of the lt x gt previous results and the lower limit is not fixed the y axis is rescaled Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO MEMory DEPTh on page 228 Number of Divisions Defines the number of divisions to be used for the y axis By default the y axis is divi ded into 10 divisions Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe DIVisions page 229 Scaling per division Determines the values shown for each division on the y axis One or more multiples of 10 c
185. am only on page 103 8 Result Configuration See chapter 5 3 10 Result Configuration on page 109 9 Display Configuration See chapter 5 2 Display Configuration on page 47 To configure settings Select any button in the Overview to open the corresponding dialog box Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key restores the entire instrument to its default values and thus closes all measurement channels on the R amp S FSW except for the default Spectrum application channel Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 149 Select Measurement Selects a measurement to be performed See chapter 3 Measurements and Result Display on page 13 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the selected window 5 3 2 5 3 2 1 DOCSIS 3 1 1 9 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration dialog boxes The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window Signal Description Access Overview gt Signal Description or
186. ames subcarriers and associated with a profile A codeword can either be defined by the first and total number of subcarriers it is assigned to or by the first and total number of symbols it is assigned to For more information see also Codewords logical subcarriers frames and NCPs on page 34 Select the DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy ree DO Mundos subcarrier symbol Symbols 2 Insert Codeword 0 1620 0 0 1 1620 1620 Delete Codeword 2 iid 2 Delete All Codewords 3 D 1350 2281 1 4 D 1350 3631 1 2 Auto from Signal 5 D 1350 1309 2 6 C 1620 2659 2 2 7 C 1620 612 3 8 B 1620 2232 3 2 9 1620 188 4 10 2700 1808 4 2 B E zen 333 _ Is OK Cancel Fig 5 4 Frame codeword configuration for downstream DOCSIS 3 1 signals CodewWord T 59 Dore ae petes eed i e e etri oerte ret ete ende aet 59 First SUDCANIGN tradotte 60 NUMBER OF 60 darte cet en eni ge bug en c td td edad 60 Numberot Symbols 5 c etre a Er eme e tane re Eo c derivare cong keen 60 Insert ceci rece o eet cre trea erre ea uy e PER SEN EET ed Yr ROSE 60 Delete COOGWOEG
187. amp S FSW User Manual Markets 259 MEL 1 00 E 263 e Zooming into the BISplay c 265 10 10 1 Markers Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Currently only 1 marker per window can be configured for standard DOCSIS 3 1 measurements lt gt lt gt ese nsn ERE aa E sans se 260 lt gt lt gt 260 CAL Culatesms DELTamalketsmisX uiae ahd 260 lt 260 lt gt lt gt 5 261 Analysis CALCulatesmMARKersm TRAQG 261 lt gt lt gt 2 aura 261 lt gt lt gt 22 00 100 1 262 CAL CulatespmMARKeFPSINSIEP sic d aa aidaa 262 DISPlay MUAB le e tenes 263 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF Reference This command selects a reference marker for a delta marker other than marker 1
188. an be selected The R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application then selects the optimal scaling from the selected values DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Example Multiples of 2 0 and 2 5 selected division range 80 130 number of divi sions 10 Possible scaling n 1 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 130 Multiples of 2 0 selected division range 80 130 number of divisions 10 Possible scaling 1 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 1 0 Each division on the y axis displays multiples of 1 10 For example for n 1 division range 0 1 number of divisions 10 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 0 2 0 Each division on the y axis displays multiples of 2 10 For example for n 1 division range 0 1 number of divisions 5 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 0 2 5 Each division on the y axis displays multiples of 2 5 10 For example for n 1 division range 0 1 number of divisions 5 0 0 25 0 5 0 75 1 0 5 0 Each division on the y axis displays multiples of 5 10 For example for n 1 division range 0 1 number of divisions 5 0 5 0 0 5 1 0 1 5 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision on page 230 5 3 11 Automatic Settings Access AUTO SET Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings and signal characteristics A
189. arameters lt Value gt Percentage of the currently displayed value range on the y axis Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO HYST LOW UPP 5 Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Hysteresis Interval Upper Lower on page 116 DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis LOWer LOWer lt Value gt For automatic scaling based on hysteresis this command defines the lower limit of the lower hysteresis interval If the minimum value in the current measurement drops below this limit the y axis is rescaled automatically For details see Hysteresis Interval Upper Lower on page 116 Parameters Value Percentage of the currently displayed value range on the y axis Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO HYST LOW LOW 5 Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Hysteresis Interval Upper Lower on page 116 DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis UPPer LOWer lt Value gt For automatic scaling based on hysteresis this command defines the lower limit of the upper hysteresis interval If the maximum value in the current measurement drops below this limit the y axis is rescaled automatically For details see Hysteresis Interval Upper Lower on page 116 Parameters lt Value gt Percentage
190. asType gt OBANdwidth OBWidth Occupied bandwidth Returns the occupied bandwidth in Hz Example CALC MARK FUNC POW RES Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 2 Measurement 2 Determining the Occupied Bandwidth on page 275 Usage Query only Retrieving Results Manual operation See Occupied Bandwidth on page 27 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X lt Position gt This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters lt Position gt Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker Table on page 20 See Marker Peak List on page 30 See X value on page 126 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics RESult lt t gt lt ResultType gt This command queries the results of a CCDF or ADP measurement for a specific trace lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt ResultType gt MEAN Average RMS power in dBm measured during the measure ment time PEAK Peak power in dBm measured during the measurement time CFACtor Determined crest factor ratio of peak power to average power in dB ALL Results of all three measurements mentioned before separated by commas lt mean
191. asurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt LIMit SUMMary MERData MINimum This command queries the minimum modulation error ratio MER limit for all data car riers as determined by the default DOCSIS 3 1 measurement The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Return values lt Value gt Default unit dB Example CALC LIM SUMM MERD MIN Usage Query only Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt LIMit SUMMary MERPilot MINimum This command queries the minimum modulation error ratio MER limit for all pilots as determined by the default DOCSIS 3 1 measurement The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Return values lt Value gt Default unit dB Example CALC LIM SUMM MERP MIN Usage Query only 10 9 1 4 Limit Check Results The following commands are required to query the results of the limit checks lt gt 1 2 250 CALOulate n LIMit SUMMary CERRor AVERage RESUIt sse 250 lt gt 1 0 250 CALOulate n LIMit SUMMary FERRor AVERage RESuIt esses 250 lt gt 1 1 1 22
192. asurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequencer not indi vidual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode Remote command INITiate n CONTinuous on 233 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a chan nel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the Sequencer is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated Remote command INITiate lt n gt IMMediate on page 234 Refresh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated and only in single sweep mode The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 applica tion This is useful for example after evaluation changes
193. ation Mode Value RF Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that no overload occurs at the RF INPUT connector for the current reference level It is the default setting By default and when electronic attenuation is not available mechanical attenuation is applied In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the refer ence level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 196 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 196 Using Electronic Attenuation If the optional Electronic Attenuation hardware is installed on the R amp S FSW you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately 5 3 4 DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center freq
194. atus bar INPUT OVLD and a message box informs you that the RF Input was discon nected Furthermore a status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register is set In this case you must decrease the level at the RF input connector and then close the message box Then measurement is possible again Reactivating the RF input is also possible via the remote command INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet Input from Noise Sources The R amp S FSW provides a connector NOISE SOURCE CONTROL with a voltage sup ply for an external noise source By switching the supply voltage for an external noise Source on or off in the firmware you can activate or deactive the device as required External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of an amplifier In this case you can first connect an external noise source whose noise power level is known in advance to the R amp S FSW and measure the total noise power From this value you can determine the noise power of the R amp S FSW Then when you measure the power level of the actual DUT you can deduct the known noise level from the total power to obtain the power level of the DUT The noise source is controlled in the Output settings see Noise Source on page 86 Receiving and Providing Trigger Signals Using one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors of the R amp S FS
195. b help is availa ble from the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html Downloads Web Help Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the DVD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instru ment Basic operations and handling are described Safety information is also included The Getting Started manual in various languages is also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html User Manuals User manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional firmware application The user manuals are available in PDF format in printable form on the Documenta tion DVD delivered with the instrument In the user manuals all instrument functions are described in detail Furthermore they provide a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples The user manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSW in general and the Spectrum application in particular Furthermore the soft ware functions that enhance the basic functionality for various applications are descri bed here An introduction to remote control is provided as well as information on main tenance instrument interfaces and troubleshooting Conventions Used in the Documentation In the indivi
196. b nde rh ned ken ament rank an nnn 12 Number oPMIRISIOLS erc td Ur e i bee a ne 73 Tasse qma fere iz del D 73 Delete 73 Delete Alli ModulBtl fis terree c tent nh rie e h gra i ha nnd o cn ea Ya D aD nun nana urna T ou 73 SCIVIT 73 Set Index Continuous line number in configuration table Minislot Modulation Defines the modulation used by the specified minislots Remote command CONFigure US CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt MINislot MODulation on page 168 Minislot Pilot Pattern Defines the pilot pattern used by the specified minislots Which patterns are available depends on the Nee FFT length e 2Kmode 1to7 e 4K mode 8 to 14 For more information see Pilot patterns on page 38 Remote command CONFigure US CHANnel PCONfig i MINislot PPATtern on page 169 5 3 3 DOCSIS 3 11 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Number of Minislots Defines the number of minislots for which the modulation is used Remote command CONFigure US CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt MINislot COUNt on page 168 Insert Modulation Inserts a new line in the table below the currently selected row Delete Modulation Deletes the currently selected row Delete All Modulations Deletes all lines in the table Save Saves the changes
197. blocked for further commands In this case you must inter rupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S FSW on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depend ing on the used interface and protocol send the following commands e Visa viClear GPIB ibclr e RSDLLibclr Now can send the ABORt command the remote channel performing the surement Starting a Measurement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abortion has been completed Usage Event SCPI confirmed INITiate lt n gt CONMeas This command restarts a single measurement that has been stopped using ABORt or finished in single measurement mode The measurement is restarted at the beginning not where the previous measurement was stopped As opposed to INI Tiate lt n gt IMMediate this command does not reset traces maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measure ments using maxhold or averaging functions Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 101 INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous lt State gt This command controls the measurement mode for an individu
198. cated as Codeword X Cont A byte index indicates which bytes are displayed in each row 4 Bitstream Ri Byte Hz m E Object Modulation Bits Index Bits Info Bits Decoded Payload Data Compact Expanded n a PLC Data 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO 00 OO OO OO OO OO 00 00 OO OO Fig 3 2 Bitstream result display for DOCSIS 3 1 standard expanded display Which information is displayed is configurable see Selected Frame on page 107 If enabled the Bitstream table includes the following information Object e Modulation Total number of bits in object e Byte index graphical display only not in remote command output R amp S FSW K192 K193 Measurements and Result Display eee UII e Bit byte values hexedecimal format for max 100 bytes For details on individual parameters see chapter 3 1 2 Signal Content Information on page 14 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH BITS see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 216 UNIT BITStream on page 231 Querying results FETCh BITStream ALL on page 239 SENSe FRAMe SELect on page 213 Constellation This result display shows the in phase and quadrature phase results for the currently Selected Frame as indicated in the Magnitude Capt
199. cation CM SP MULPIv3 1 104 141218 Cable Television Laboratories Inc 2013 2014 e 2 Data Over Cable Service Interface Specifications DOCSIS 3 1 Physical Layer Specification CM SP PHYv3 1 104 141218 Cable Television Laboratories Inc 2013 2014 3 Data Over Cable Service Interface Specifications DOCSIS 3 1 Physical Layer Acceptance Test Plan CM TP PHYv3 1 ATP D04 150630 DRAFT Cable Television Laboratories Inc 2014 2015 The following application note discusses the fundamental technological advances of DOCSIS 3 1 and presents measurement solutions from Rohde amp Schwarz 7MH89 DOCSIS 3 1 Data File Format iq tar data is packed in a file with the extension iq tar An ig tar file contains I Q data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the Source of data e g the sample rate The objective of the iq tar file format is to separate data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addition the file format allows you to preview the data in a web browser and allows you to include user specific data The iq tar container packs several files into a single tar archive file Files in tar format can be unpacked using standard archive tools see http en wikipedia org wiki Comparison of file archivers available for most operating systems The advantage of tar files is that the archived files inside the tar file are not changed not c
200. ce nnn 177 INPubDIOXSANGSEUPEPGE ERE Eun a 177 2 2 10 020 6 66 h nt nh nennt rennen nnns 177 l Ixmaslencrow c a 177 MINUS RA TSAO tienden a bene FR SuSE REX 178 INPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital I Q input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface For details see the section Interface Status Information for the optional Digital Base band Interface in the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer User Manual Return values ConnState Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected lt gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy lt SampleRate gt Maximum or currently used sample rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indica ted by lt SampleRateType gt parameter lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device Not Started Has
201. coded codewords to the total number of trans mitted codewords FETC SCS ALL Result PIL BPSK 53 1570854187 nan nan nan nan nan nan nan PLCP BPSK 52 8738098145 1 nan nan nan nan nan nan PLCD QAM16 53 4272041321 1 0 0 nan nan 0 0 NCPA QAM16 53 28358078 387 0 0 nan nan 0 0 PROFA QAM64 53 2824478149 67 0 0 0 0 0 0 PROFB QAM1024 53 3110733032 59 0 0 0 0 0 0 PROFC QAM1024 53 315738678 63 0 0 0 0 0 0 PROFD QAM4096 53 2790908813 64 0 0 0 0 0 0 Query only See Signal Content Summary on page 25 FETCh SUMMary ALL This command returns all result summary values as a comma separated list in the order they are displayed in the result display For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modula tion Accuracy Parameters on page 13 Example Usage Manual operation FETC SUMM ALL Query only See Result Summary on page 24 FETCh SUMMary CERRor AVERage FETCh SUMMary CERRor MAXimum R amp S9FSW K192 K193 Remote Commands for DOCSIS 3 1 Measurements pa r w 10 9 1 3 FETCh SUMMary CERRor MINimum FETCh SUMMary FERRor AVERage FETCh SUMMary FERRor MAXimum FETCh SUMMary FERRor MINimum FETCh SUMMary MER AVERage FETCh SUMMary MER MAXimum FETCh SUMMary MER MINimum FETCh SUMMary MERData AVERage FETCh SUMMary MERData MAXimum FETCh SUMMary MERData MINimum FETCh SUMMary ME
202. cted input signal In the OFDM Channel Description tab define the general OFDM channel trans mission settings including Stream direction Downstream the OFDM spectrum location the PLC location the NCP modulation the FFT length Select Continuous Pilots Excluded Subcarriers Configuration Note continuous pilots can also be detected automatically see step 16 For each set of continuous pilots and excluded subcarriers Insert a new line R amp S FSW K192 K193 to Perform Measurements in the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application EEE EEE ee ey b Assign the subcarriers either by entering a discrete set of numbers or by defin ing aseries with a fixed start stop and increment value Select and close the Continuous Pilots Excluded Subcarriers Configura tion dialog box 7 Inthe Signal Description dialog box select the Profile Configuration tab 8 For each set of modems with similar transmission conditions configure a profile that defines the modulation to be used by which subcarrier a Selecta profile from the list and then Edit profile b Insert a new line c Select the subcarriers either by entering a discrete set of numbers or by defin ing a series with a fixed start stop and increment value d Select the modulation these subcarriers use for transmission e Select OK and close the Profile Modulation Subcarrier Assignment dialog box 9 Inthe Signal Description
203. ctors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW Trigger input parameters are available in the Trigger dialog box Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 206 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection page 206 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 207 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command
204. ctrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 50 Selecting a Measurement The following commands are required to define the measurement type in a remote environment The selected measurement must be started explicitely see chapter 10 8 Starting a Measurement on page 232 For details on available measurements see chapter 3 Measurements and Result Dis play on page 13 The DOCSIS 3 1 1 measurement captures the data from the DOCSIS 3 1 signal using a nearly rectangular filter with a relatively large bandwidth This measurement is selected when the DOCSIS 3 1 measurement channel is activated The commands to select a different measurement or return to the DOCSIS 3 1 I Q measurement are described here Use the LAYout commands to change the display see chapter 10 7 Configuring the Result Display on page 215 CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer SELect sse 150 lt gt lt gt 5 150 CALCulatesns STATisties CODPDSTAT6 iit att entertain ataca ett ctae ta eia 150 Selecting Measurement CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect lt MeasT ype gt This command selects the occupied bandwidth measurement
205. curacy Timing Trigger Baseband RF IQ File Signal Path Analog I jQ NCO For more information on the optional Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual Analog Baseband Input State trier 78 Uf COAG i 78 Input Eme 79 High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband esee eet 79 jecit C EE 80 Analog Baseband Input State Enables or disable the use of the Analog Baseband input source for measurements Analog Baseband is only available if the optional Analog Baseband Interface is instal led Remote command INPut SELect on page 174 Mode Defines the format of the input signal jQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two inputs are required for a complex signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature component DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Only Low IF 1 The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT I connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband 1 If a center frequency greater than 0 Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF 1 Q Only Low IF Q The i
206. d in the Magnitude Capture display The symbols are displayed on the x axis the carriers are displayed on the y axis The MER is color coded according to its level and is indicated as a colored dot for each symbol and carrier The legend for the color coding is provided by a color bar at the top of the diagram 3 MER vs Symb X Carrier m Note In 3 dimensional result displays the marker position must be defined by its value on the x axis carrier and y axis symbol The parameter value MER is queried as the third dimension z In this result display only a single normal marker is available Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MERSC see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 216 Results SENSe FRAMe SELect on page 213 TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 253 Power vs Carrier upstream only Displays the power level per carrier for the currently Selected Frame as indicated in the Magnitude Capture display The carriers are displayed on the x axis the power is dis played on the y axis The power unit depends on the Unit setting The carrier unit depends on the Carrier Axes Unit setting um SSS S E User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 22 R amp S FSW K192 K193 Measurements and Result Display ics P tl 4 Power vs Carrier 1 Clrw 0 Carrier 204 Carrier 2047 Carrier Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PCAR see
207. descrip tion Parameters lt CyclicPrefix gt lt CyclicPrefix gt Usage Manual operation downstream 192 Useful symbol period starts after 192 samples or 0 9375us 5256 Useful symbol period starts after 256 samples or 1 25us 512 Useful symbol period starts after 512 samples or 2 5us S768 Useful symbol period starts after 768 samples or 3 75us 51024 Useful symbol period starts after 1024 samples 5 0us upstream S96 Useful symbol period starts after 96 samples 0 9375 us 128 Useful symbol period starts after 128 samples or 1 25 us 160 Useful symbol period starts after 160 samples or 1 5625 ys 192 Useful symbol period starts after 192 samples or 0 9375us 5224 Useful symbol period starts after 224 samples or 1 875 us 5256 Useful symbol period starts after 256 samples 2 5us 5288 Useful symbol period starts after 288 samples 2 8125 us 320 Useful symbol period starts after 320 samples or 3 125 us 5384 Useful symbol period starts after 384 samples or 3 75 us 512 Useful symbol period starts after 512 samples 5 0us S640 Useful symbol period starts after 640 samples or 6 25 us Query only See Cyclic Prefix CP on page 67 Retrieving Results FETCh SCDetailed ALL This command returns all detailed signal content values as a comma separated list Note this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only For newer programs use the impr
208. dual application manuals the specific instrument functions of the applica tion are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parame ters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSW is not inclu ded in the application manuals All user manuals are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the Documentation DVD delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSW by replacing modules Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The most recent release notes are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html gt Downloads gt Firmware Application Notes Application notes application cards white papers and educational notes are further publications that provide more comprehensive descriptions and background informa tion The latest
209. e e PLC Data NCPs all e Profile A e m e Profile P Return values Object Information type nan Invalid data PIL Pilots PLCP PLC Preamble PLCD PLC Data EXCL Excluded subcarrier NCPA NCP All all codewords PROFA PROFP Profile A to P lt Modulation gt BPSK QPSK QAM16 QAM64 QAM128 QAM256 512 QAM1024 2048 QAM4096 8192 QAM16384 NONE MIXED Modulation see Modulation on page 63 lt gt lt NoObject gt lt LDPC_ITER gt lt BER_PRE gt lt BER_PRE_N gt lt BER_POST gt lt BER_POST_N gt lt CWERR_POST gt lt CWERR_POST_N gt Example Usage Manual operation Retrieving Results Modulation error ratio in dB Total number of data elements PLC preambles PLC data objects NCPs or codewords in the profile Low density parity check Number of iterations Low density parity check Absolute number of bit errors before decoding Low density parity check Bit error ratio before decoding the ratio of errored bits to the total number of transmitted bits Low density parity check Absolute number of bit errors after decoding Low density parity check Bit error rate after decoding the ratio of falsely decoded bits to the total number of transmitted bits Low density parity check Absolute number of codeword errors after decoding Low density parity check Block error rate after decoding the ratio of falsely de
210. e DEM NCP AUTO SIGNAL Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Auto Detection NCP Content on page 60 10 5 8 Evaluation Range The evaluation range defines which data is evaluated in the result display Note that as opposed to manual operation the PPDUs to be analyzed can be defined either by the number of data symbols the number of data bytes or the measurement duration GONFiguire MEXG S TA ur e 211 GONFigure MEXGC SUBCarmier COL NL en t eot Po eran exe Re tenu tuna 212 CONFigure MEXG SUB Oattef SET euer nenne pna eek RR tern da Da RES 212 SENSE FRAME COUNT 212 SENSe FIRAME COUNESTAM O gt 213 SENSE JFRAME SELEG e 213 214 CONFigure MEXC STATe lt Mode gt Excludes specific subcarriers from modulation error ratio MER calculation Parameters lt Mode gt OFF All subcarriers are included in MER calculation AUTO The number of excluded subcarriers specified by CONFigure MEXC SUBCarrier COUNt with the worst MER are automati cally excluded from MER calculation USER The subcarriers speci
211. e to Hysteresis and define the percentage of the currently displayed value range to be used as Hysteresis Intervals for rescaling Optionally for automatic scaling define a fixed upper or lower limit for the y axis scale Auto Fix Range 20 Press the SWEEP key then select Refresh to update the result displays for the new settings without performing a new measurement 8 3 How to Evaluate the OBW or CCDF for DOCSIS 3 1 Signals 1 Press the MODE key and select the DOCSIS 3 1 application The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the DOCSIS 3 1 applica tion data acquisition is performed by default 2 Select the Signal Description button to describe the expected input signal User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 136 How to Evaluate the CCDF for DOCSIS 3 1 Signals 3 Select the required measurement a Press the MEAS key b In the Select Measurement dialog box select the required measurement The selected measurement is activated with the default settings for DOCSIS 3 1 immediately 4 f necessary adapt the settings as described for the individual measurements in the R amp S FSW User Manual 9 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the surement If the results do not meet your expectations try the following methods to optimize the measurement Error Messages Requires R amp S FSW B320 320 MHz analysis bandwidth option 138 Requires R amp
212. e DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Manual operation See Subcarrier Range Start Increment Stop on page 57 CONFigure DS CHANnel CPES lt i gt SUBCarrier SET lt Subcarrier gt lt Subcarrier gt Defines a comma separated list of discrete subcarriers to be configured identically in the Continuous Pilots and Excluded Subcarrier Assignment table Suffix lt i gt 1 200 index in the Continuous Pilots and Excluded Subcarrier Assign ment table Parameters lt Subcarrier gt integer Subcarrier number Range 1 to 4095 4k 8191 8k Example CONFigure DS CHANnel CPES2 SUBCarrier SET 301 302 Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Subcarrier Set on page 57 CONFigure DS CHANnel CPES lt i gt SUBCarrier STARt lt SubcarrierStart gt Defines the first subcarrier in a series of subcarriers to be configured identically in the Continuous Pilots and Excluded Subcarrier Assignment table Suffix lt i gt 1 200 index in the Continuous Pilots and Excluded Subcarrier Assign ment table Parameters lt SubcarrierStart gt integer Subcarrier number Must be lower than the parameter used by CONFigure DS CHANnel CPES i SUBCarrier STOP on page 161 Range 1 to 4095 4k 8191 8k Example CONF DS CHAN CPES2 SUBC STAR 100 Example For a detailed example se
213. e INPut EATT AUTO page 197 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 90 INPut EATT AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible Parameters State 1 0 OFF 1 ON 0 OFF RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 90 INPut EATT STATe State This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off Parameters State 110 ON OFF 1 ON 0 OFF RST 0 Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 90 INPut GAIN VALue Gain This command selects the gain level if the preamplifier is activated INP GAIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on page 198 The command requires the additional preamplifier hardware option Parameters Gain 15 dB 30 dB The availability of gain levels depends on the model of the
214. e R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application can distinguish their contents from the useful data Excluded subcarriers are configured in the signal description in the Exclu ded Subcarrier Assignment table Below the table a modulation vs subcarrier diagram indicates which channels are defined as excluded subcarriers Excluded Subcarrier Assignment DO Set D 7 Index Type Start Increment Stop 0 Excluded Subcarriers 60 1 Excluded Subcarriers 1000 2 1365 Insert Delete Delete All Cancel Fig 5 7 Excluded subcarrier assignment for upstream DOCSIS 3 1 signals IS TMG ETE 70 TY 70 Subcarrier Range Start Increment 22440 70 A SS 70 do N E 71 User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 69 DOCSIS 3 1 I AQ Measurement Modulation Accuracy 71 Insert ANG sk ene aes 71 Deleting amp MSS 2 2 71 Deleting fie entire 71 a 71 jc EE 71 Set Ind
215. e a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power For R amp S FSW26 or higher models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the pream plifier is activated For R amp S FSW8 13 models the following settings are available Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 198 INPut GAIN VALue on page 197 Trigger Settings Access Overview Trigger or TRIG gt Trigger Config R amp S FSW K192 K193 Configuration Trigger settings determine when the R amp S FSW starts to capture the input signal Trigger Source Trigger In Out Source Level Drop Out Time Offset Slope Falling Hysteresis Holdoff External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box Trigger Source Trigger In Out Output Type User Defined Level Tow Pulse Length 100 0 us Send Trigger Trigger 3 For more information on trigger settings and step by step instructions on configuring triggered measurements see the R amp S FSW User Manual DOE i ee F User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 92 DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy eta a ac 96 L Repetition Interval or ttr ter aet retur tapes trinus 96 L Drop Out TIME
216. e chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Subcarrier Range Start Increment Stop on page 57 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy CONFigure DS CHANnel CPES lt i gt SUBCarrier STOP lt SubcarrierStop gt Defines the last subcarrier in a series of subcarriers to be configured identically in the Continuous Pilots and Excluded Subcarrier Assignment table Suffix lt i gt 1 200 index in the Continuous Pilots and Excluded Subcarrier Assign ment table Parameters lt SubcarrierStop gt integer Subcarrier number Must be higher than the parameter used by CONFigure DS CHANnel CPES i SUBCarrier STARt on page 160 Range 1 to 4095 4k 8191 8k Example CONF DS CHAN CPES2 SUBC STOP 250 Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Subcarrier Range Start Increment Stop on page 57 CONFigure DS CHANnel CPES n SUBCarrier TYPE lt gt Defines the type of configuration for the specified entry in the Continuous Pilots and Excluded Subcarrier Assignment table Suffix n 1 n index in the Continuous Pilots and Excluded Subcarrier Assign ment table Parameters lt gt CPIL ESUB PLC Physical link channel Query only
217. e connected via the cable only trigger port can be used to trigger a measurement Trigger port 2 is configured as output if the high accuracy timing option is active Make sure not to activate this option if you use trigger port 2 in your measurement setup When you first enable this setting you are prompted to connect the cable for high accuracy timing to trigger ports 1 and 2 If you cancel this prompt the setting remains disabled As soon as you confirm this prompt the cable must be in place 5 3 3 2 DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy the firmware does not check the connection In remote operation the setting is activated without a prompt Remote command CALibration AIQ HATiming STATe on page 180 Center Frequency Defines the center frequency for analog baseband input For real type baseband input 1 or only the center frequency is always 0 Hz Note If the analysis bandwidth to either side of the defined center frequency exceeds the minimum frequency 0 Hz or the maximum frequency 40 MHz 80 MHz an error is displayed In this case adjust the center frequency or the analysis bandwidth Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 193 Power Sensor Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Power Sensor or INPUT OUTPUT gt Power Sensor Config The R amp S FSW can also analyze data from a connected power sensor For background information on working with power s
218. e from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is O Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 194 5 3 3 5 Amplitude Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Amplitude or AMPT Amplitude Config Amplitude settings determine how the R amp S FSW must process or display the expected input power levels Input Source Frequency Amplitude PowerSensor Output Input Settings Reference Level Preamplifier Value 5 0 dBm Input Coupling nm Offset gt Impedance 500 RF Attenuation ect enuation Manual Value 15 0 dB Value 90 L Attenuation Mode VAUS onrein 90 Using Electronic 1 nennen enne nenne 90 petes up 91 91 Reference Level The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the hardware of the R amp S FSW is adapted according to this value it is recom mended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 195 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithm
219. e hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual How to Analyze Modulation Accuracy and Signal Contents for DOCSIS 3 1 Downstream Signals 8 How to Perform Measurements in the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to perform a measurement with the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application The following tasks are described 8 1 How to Analyze Modulation Accuracy and Signal Contents for DOCSIS 3 1 Down ciue M 132 How to Analyze Modulation Accuracy and Signal Contents for DOCSIS 3 1 Upstream Signals rus 134 How to Evaluate the OBW or CCDF for DOCSIS 3 1 Signals 136 How to Analyze Modulation Accuracy and Signal Con tents for DOCSIS 3 1 Downstream Signals Press the MODE key A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available on your R amp S FSW Select the DOCSIS 3 1 item ZA AS DOCSIS 3 1 The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the DOCSIS 3 1 applica tion Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for a DOCSIS 3 1 mea surement Select the Signal Description button to describe the expe
220. eF qe Rede 203 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel EXTernal port csse 203 TRIGger SEQuenceLl EEVelIPPOWE A 203 1 204 5 1 1 204 TRIGgSi SEQuence SLOPE 204 TRIGger SEQuence SOURGe 2 1 rere ec picti cci cic erroe eese ee A niaaa 204 TRIGSer SEQuence TIMERIN TGrval z 2 utn ee eren RE REF eR OPER DEBES euin 205 TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the baseband power trigger event The command requires the optional Digital Baseband Interface or the optional Analog Baseband Interface Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 202 command for new remote control programs Parameters Period Range 150 ns to 1000s RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt
221. eband Interface B71 settings 78 LT 75 Coupling remote 172 Digital Baseband Interface settings 76 te err erede rr 42 Overload remote etis 172 74 Settings 74 91 Signal parameters retener rrr 42 Source Configuration softkey 74 Source Radio frequency RF 74 Input sample rate ISR Digital in cte ee ets 77 Input sources Analog Baseband sssrin iini 78 Digital ito e en Et 77 INSTA ANON 9 Keys BW sin LINES MKR FUNCT scontro 48 RUN CONT 4e xe 101 RUN SINGLE 101 SPAN M 48 L Limits Defining remote 248 Lines Gneci 48 ge 75 Magnitude Capture 19 Trace data oer 255 256 Marker Functions MOD nee 48 Marker table Config rlhg orte tret e Ern Evaluation method i Market to Trace i asie Hus Markers dimensional 262 3 dimensional result displays 22 23 125 Assigr
222. econ ar cim eripe Result display vs symbol trace data Continue single sweep 101 Continuous Sequencer SOMK CY ee rn 47 Continuous sweep SOMKCY erret i etes 101 Conventions SGPlicommarids cnr mrs 140 Copying Measurement channel remote 145 Coupling Input vocac eiecit 172 D m 98 100 Data format Remote Data input Data output DC offset Analog Baseband B71 remote control 180 Decimal separator MACE EXPOR E 123 Dela EE deae 127 PS TIMING ee cates 127 Demodulation COMMQUIGIING 103 Configuring remote sse 209 Diagram footer InformallOn eco err re rrr egere 12 Diagrams Evaluation method erect c roro rrr hene 29 Differential input Analog Baseband B71 remote control 178 Analog Baseband B71 79 Digital Baseband Interface S 76 Input status remote 175 Digital 1 Q Enhanced mode rrt 94 Input connection information Input settirigs rene retener 76 Ere gine
223. ected row Delete Codeword Deletes the currently selected row Delete All Codewords Deletes all rows in the table Auto Detection NCP Content For each new codeword that starts in a frame the first subcarrier and the number of subcarriers in total for the codeword is provided as a Next Codeword Pointer NCP The contents of the NCP can be configured manually or detected automatically by the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application If Auto from Signal is selected the position of the codewords NCP content are detected in the signal automatically during demodulation The entire table is filled auto matically If User Defined is selected the frames must be configured manually in the Code word Frame Configuration table Remote command SENSe DEMod NCP AUTO on page 211 Save Saves the changes to the table and closes the dialog box Cancel Closes the dialog box without saving the changes DOCSIS 3 1 1 9 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Profile Configuration Downstream Access Overview gt Signal Description gt Profile Configuration or MEAS gt Signal Description gt Profile Configuration Profiles define the modulation used by each subcarrier For each set of modems with similar transmission conditions a profile can then be assigned see Codeword Frame Configuration on page 58 For more information see also Subcarriers and profiles on page 33 Profile Management 2 iiie
224. ed Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate on page 207 5 3 5 Data Acquisition Access Overview Data Acquisition or MEAS CONFIG gt Data Acquisition You can define how much and how data is captured from the input signal For DOCSIS 3 1 measurements data is always captured with a fixed bandwidth of 192 00 MHz and a fixed sample rate of 204 80 MHz downstream or 102 4 MHz upstream R amp S FSW K192 K193 Configuration rigger to Frame 5 21 ms Date ca sition Data Acquisition Trigger Source Trigger In Out Sample Rate Analysis Bandwidth ABW Capture Time Number of Samples Swap IQ Filter Adjacent Channels is pelis T 99 Analysis Bandwidth 99 deve b 100 8 2 100 TTL MM 100 Filter Adjacent Channels downstream 11101 100 Sample Rate Specifies the amount of data that is analyzed within the specified Capture Time For DOCSIS 3 1 downstream measurements a fixed sample rate of 204 8 MHz is used For DOCSIS 3 1 upstream measurements a fixed sample rate of 102 4 MHz is used Remote command RA
225. ed for timing error on a per symbol basis Remote command SENSe TRACking TIME on page 209 5 3 8 Demodulation downstream only Access Overview gt Demodulation or MEAS CONFIG gt Demod The demodulation settings define which functions are performed during demodulation for downstream signals only DOCSIS 3 111 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Demod Auto Detection Continuous Pilots User Defined Frame Configuration NCP Content User Defined Decoding Codewords Bitstream Auto Detection Continuous Pilots downstream 104 Auto Detection NCP Content iiia 104 104 5 bee d t eet e S el e N 105 Auto Detection Continuous Pilots downstream only Defines how continuous pilots are detected in the symbols If Auto from Signal is selected continuous pilots are detected automatically during demodulation If User Defined is selected the pilots must be configured manually in the Continuous Pilots and Excluded Subcarrier Assignment table using the Type Continuous Pilots Note As soon as an entry in the Continuous Pilots and Excluded Subcarrier Assign ment table is defined or changed to the Type Continuous Pilots this setting is auto matically set to User Defined Remote command SENSe DEMod CPILots AUTO
226. ed or restricted to peak values data is stored as it was captured without further processing The data is stored as complex values in 32 bit floating point format Multi channel data is not supported The data is stored in a format with the file extension ig tar For a detailed description see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual e ImporUEXpOrt EUICHUOS cdi ee rete rne e et n e d e RR s 130 Import Export Functions The following import and export functions are available via softkeys in the Save Recall menu which is displayed when you select the Save or Open icon in the tool bar These functions are only available if no measurement is running In particular if Continuous Sweep RUN CONT is active the import export functions are not available For a description of the other functions in the Save Recall menu see the R amp S FSW User Manual Export Opens a submenu to configure data export Import Export Functions Export Export Opens a file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process data such as the Analyzer or optional applications Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although th
227. ee INSTrument LIST on page 147 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 147 Example INST CRE IQ IQAnalyzer2 Adds an additional I Q Analyzer channel named IQAnalyzer2 INSTrument CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command replaces a measurement channel with another one Setting parameters ChannelName1 String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 147 lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 147 Example INST CRE REPL IQAnalyzer2 IQ IQAnalyzer Replaces the channel named IQAnalyzer2 by a new measure ment channel of type IQ Analyzer named IQAnalyzer Usage Setting only INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel If you delete the last measurement channel the default Spectrum channel is activa
228. ee MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 264 Parameters lt Selection gt SINGle Only a single trace is selected for export namely the one speci fied by the MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe command ALL Selects all active traces and result tables e g Result Summary marker peak list etc in the current application for export to an ASCII file The trace parameter for the MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe command is ignored RST SINGle Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Export all Traces and all Table Results on page 123 MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe lt Trace gt lt FileName gt This command exports trace data from the specified window to an ASCII file Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt Trace gt Number of the trace to be stored lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR1 TRAC 3 C TEST ASC Stores trace from window 1 in the file TEST ASC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Export
229. el from the Measurement Meas gt Ref Sets the currently measured power as a reference value for the relative display The reference value can also be set manually via the Reference Value setting Remote command CALCulate n PMETer p RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE on page 183 Reference Value Defines the reference value for relative measurements in the unit dBm Remote command CALCulate cn PMETer p RELative MAGNitude page 183 Use Ref Lev Offset If activated takes the reference level offset defined for the analyzer into account for the measured power see Shifting the Display Offset on page 89 If deactivated takes no offset into account Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt ROFFset STATe on page 187 Average Count Number of Readings Defines the number of readings averages to be performed after a single sweep has been started This setting is only available if manual averaging is selected Meas Time Average setting The values for the average count range from 0 to 256 in binary steps 1 2 4 8 For average count 7 0 or 1 one reading is performed The general averaging and sweep count for the trace are independent from this setting Results become more stable with extended average particularly if signals with low power are measured This setting can be used to minimize the influence of noise in the power sensor measurement Remote command SENSe PHETer p MTIMe AVERage COUN
230. emove Subcarrier Set Excluding Subcarriers from MER Calculation Removes the currently selected entry Save Subcarrier Set Excluding Subcarriers from MER Calculation Saves the changes to the table and closes the dialog box Cancel Subcarrier Set Excluding Subcarriers from MER Calculation Closes the dialog box without saving the changes 5 3 10 5 3 10 1 DOCSIS 3 1 1 9 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Result Configuration Access Overview 2 Result Config or MEAS CONFIG gt Result Config Some evaluation methods require or allow for additional settings to configure the result display Note that the available settings depend on the selected window see Specifics for on page 50 Marker settings are described in chapter 6 2 Markers on page 124 Table ConfigulatoD coe rm REPRE 109 Display aidia 110 5 114 Table Configuration Access Overview 2 Result Config gt Table Config or MEAS CONFIG gt Result Config gt Table Config You can configure which results are displayed in table results see Result Summary on page 24 Signal Content Detailed on page 25 Signal Content Summary on page 25 and Bitstream downstream only on page 17 However the results are always calculated regardless of their visibility on the screen
231. en layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measure ment channel LAYOoUtADDEWINBONW T vga enc to 216 EA Y oUEGATalog NVINIBOW I cct ei road cem cenar tete dr em c tv eeu 218 LAYoutTIDENty WINBOW 1i iiir o rauca eed idee pu vL RR EENEN 218 LAY out REMoveDWINDGW ei retten etait at each 218 2 219 LAYOUTS PICMG UO 219 LAY out WINDOW PP Ex RESQUE 221 LAY Out WINDOWSRPS DDENIfy iuis i ritui daai dete pepe cue bene ct eran dad 221 LAY out WINDOWS REMOVE ccc tit riore peti d cta xr aed sere venues entr t etos 221 LAYouEWINDOWwsSnhnPeREPLSCO inicio coi veniva autos ee cedo eve CY Teva vk dT a aoa sad ve eed e 222 LAYout ADD WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowT ype gt This command adds a window to the display in the active measurement channel This command is always
232. ency of the instrument or to the frequency of marker 1 Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency LINK on page 185 Unit Scale Selects the unit with which the measured power is to be displayed Available units are dBm dB W and 96 If dB or 96 is selected the display is relative to the reference value that is defined with either the Meas Ref setting or the Reference Value setting Remote command UNIT n PMETer p POWer on page 188 UNIT n PMETer p POWer RATio on 188 Meas Time Average Selects the measurement time or switches to manual averaging mode In general results are more precise with longer measurement times The following settings are recommended for different signal types to obtain stable and precise results Short Stationary signals with high power gt 40dBm because they require only a short measurement time and short measurement time provides the highest repetition rates Normal Signals with lower power or modulated signals Long Signals at the lower end of the measurement range 50 dBm or Signals with lower power to minimize the influence of noise DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Manual Manual averaging mode The average count is set with the Average Count Number of Readings setting Remote command SENSe lt gt on page 186 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage STATe on page 187 Setting the Reference Lev
233. end of an OFDM symbol The required period depends on the channel bandwidth and the number of excluded carriers within the channel The larger the roll off period the more time transmission takes however the more useful subcarriers are available in the frequency domain This command describes the parameters for downstream signals For upstream sig nals see CONFigure 1 ROFF on page 157 Parameters lt RollOff gt AMRO SO S32 S64 S96 S128 S160 S192 S224 S256 AMRO The maximum possible roll off period is used automatically 50 samples in the roll off period for no transmit windowing S64 The roll off period contains 64 samples and lasts 0 3125 us 128 The roll off period contains 128 samples and lasts 0 625 us 192 The roll off period contains 192 samples and lasts 0 9375 us 256 The roll off period contains 256 samples and lasts 1 25 us RST AMRO Example CONF CHAN ROFF S64 Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Roll off on page 54 See Roll off on page 68 CONFigure DS CHANnel NCP MODulation lt NCPModulation gt Defines the modulation used by the Next Codeword Pointer NCP Parameters lt NCPModulation gt QPSK QAM16 QAM64 RST QAM16 Example CONF DS CHAN NCP MOD 16 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Example For a detailed example see
234. ensors see the R amp S FSW User Manual Power Sensor Settings Power sensor settings are available in the Power Sensor tab of the Input dialog box Each sensor is configured on a separate tab Input Source Power Sensor State Continuous Update Sensori Select Sensor2 Zeroing Power Sensor Meas Ref Sensor3 Frequency Manual Reference Value 67 19 dBm Sensor4 o V ge Rae T e Center gt Use Ref Level Offset Unit Scale Number of Readings Meas Time Average Duty Cycle External Power Trigger External Trigger Level 20 0 dBm Hysteresis 10 0 Dropout Time 100 0 ps Holdoff Time 0 06 Slope Rising Falling DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy ici EET 81 Continuous Value Updale 2 rr ett te S Rx 81 rjr Me 81 OF t 82 MANUAL 82 Frequency iie de Ex ani tei Mie Exi ERE 82 Em 82 Meas Til AVOtage ndi edere ree a Eat Ex ERROR LL HE EE RE YE ao LEVEL HER dE 82 Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement gt 83 CM 83 Use Ref 83 Average Count Number of Readings 2 222 criar reiner aane ica 83 DUTY 83
235. ent Modulation Accuracy Center frequency Defines the center frequency of the signal in Hertz The center frequency of the complete signal is dependant on the center frequency of the subcarrier 0 of the OFDM channel which defines the beginning of the OFDM spectrum If the OFDM Spectrum Location is changed then the general center fre quency is also changed and vice versa Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 193 OFDM Spectrum Location Specifies the center frequency in Hz of the subcarrier 0 of the OFDM channel which defines the beginning of the OFDM spectrum The default value for this setting is derived from the current Center frequency If the spectrum location is changed the center frequency is adapted accordingly and vice versa Remote command CONFigure DS CHANnel SPECtrum FREQuency on page 155 Ner FFT length Specifies the length of the FFT defining the OFDM transmission which corresponds to the number of phsyical subcarriers mode Af 50 kHz 4096 subcarriers at 50 kHz spacing FFT length 4096 samples 8K mode Af 25 kHz 8192 subcarriers at 25 kHz spacing FFT length 8192 samples Remote command CONFigure CHANnel NFFT on page 152 Cyclic Prefix CP Length of the configurable cyclic prefix The cyclic prefix determines where the useful data starts and prevents inter symbol interference between multiple OFDM symbols during transmission Note The cyclic prefix mus
236. ent Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt The evaluation method selected by the LAY ADD WIND command also affects the results of the trace data query see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt Details on the returned trace data depending on the evaluation method are provided here one see SENSe FRAMe SELect page 213 o graphical results are based on a single frame only namely the currently selected No trace data is available for the following numeric evaluation methods Bitstream Signal Content Detail e Result Summary Global Detailed For details on the graphical results of these evaluation methods see chapter 3 1 3 Evaluation Methods for DOCSIS 3 1 I Q Measurements on page 16 e Constellattgl 255 LIC 0711 1 LE 256 e 256 MER VS CaMel 256 e MER VS Syltibol re RR a 257 vs Symbol X 00 0 nennen nennen 257 e 22 2 257 e Power vs Symbol X 257 SOS CUM 257 8 amp tee qe e ra e e v d eu
237. er trace data Minimum bol EE 117 Modulation Constellation th dte et 112 Inverted I Q 199 Inverted WO encre nid etas 100 Modulation Accuracy Parameters 13 Multiple Measurement channels 46 M ltiple ZOOImm 129 Noise SOUECO cored 42 86 Number of Readings Power SENSOR cerdo aede dece de aioli 83 OBW Configuring applications 119 Results Occupied bandwidth See OBW aia 27 Offset FrequerCoy nee re eren 88 89 Options Electronic attenuation High pass filter i Preambplifiet 2 rrr rre rer ies Output Configuration Configuration remote IF frequencies IF frequency remote IF Out Frequency IF so rce remote eee tea NO SE SOUIGB io emere dee Parameters Settings Trigger Vid6O aisis Vid oisigrial trn rre i nee Overload alant 42 RF input dehet ttd 172 Overview Configuring DOCSIS 3 1 measurements 49
238. er Set Adds a new entry to the left of the currently selected entry Remove Subcarrier Set Removes the currently selected entry Insert Inserts a new line in the table below the currently selected row 5 3 2 2 DOCSIS 3 1 I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy Delete Deletes the currently selected row Delete All Deletes all lines in the table Save Saves the changes to the table and closes the dialog box Cancel Closes the dialog box without saving the changes Upstream Signal Description Access Overview gt Signal Description gt Stream Direction Upstream or MEAS CONFIG gt Signal Description gt Stream Direction e OFDM Channel Description Upstream tet ee tct 65 e Excluded Subcartier Assignment re dain nie 69 Profile Configuration 71 OFDM Channel Description Upstream Access Overview gt Signal Description gt OFDM Channel Description or MEAS CONFIG gt Signal Description gt OFDM Channel Description The general OFDM channel transmission settings are configured in the Signal Description dialog box R amp S9FSW K192 K193 Configuration Signal Description recen OFDM Channel Description Profile Configuration Stream Direction Center Frequency 13 25 GHz 13 1476 GHz Nec 2K mode Af 50 kHz Cydic Prefix CP Roll off Auto Max Roll Off Symbols Per Frame K
239. er values can be provided as carrier numbers or carrier frequencies see Car rier Axes Unit on page 113 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SFL see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 216 Results SENSe FRAMe SELect on page 213 TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 253 User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 26 Frequency Sweep Measurements 3 2 Frequency Sweep Measurements 3 2 1 Access Overview gt Select Measurement or MEAS gt Select Meas Parameters that are common to several digital standards and are often required in sig nal and spectrum test scenarios can be determined by the standard measurements provided in the R amp S FSW base unit Spectrum application These measurements cap ture only the power level magnitude which we refer to as RF data of the signal as opposed to the two components provided by data Frequency sweep measurements can tune on a constant frequency Zero span mea surement or sweep a frequency range Frequency sweep measurement The signal cannot be demodulated based on the captured RF data However the required power information can be determined much more precisely as more noise is filtered out of the signal The frequency sweep measurements provided by the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 applica tion are identical to the corresponding measurements in the base unit but are pre con figured according to the requirements of the selected DOCSIS 3 1 standard For details on these meas
240. eration See PLC Start Index L on page 54 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy CONFigure DS CHANnel PLC MODulation Queries the currently used PLC modulation Return values lt ModType gt Currently only 16QAM modulation is supported Example CONF DS CHAN PLC MOD Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Usage Query only Manual operation See PLC Modulation on page 55 CONFigure DS CHANnel SPECtrum FREQuency lt Frequency gt Specifies the center frequency in Hz of the subcarrier 0 of the OFDM channel fsco which defines the beginning of the OFDM spectrum The default value is derived from the current center frequency If the spectrum location is changed the center frequency is adapted accordingly see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 193 Parameters Frequency Default unit Hz Example CONF DS CHAN SPEC FREO 1285000 Manual operation See OFDM Spectrum Location on page 53 See OFDM Spectrum Location on page 67 CONFigure DS CHANnel TIDepth lt TimelnterDepth gt Defines the maximum number of delay lines used for time interleaving The required depth depends on the symbol duration that is the subcarrier spacing Setting parameters lt TimelnterDepth gt Range 1 to 16 for NFFT 8K mode 32 for NFFT 4K mode RST 16 NFFT 4K mode Example CONF DS CHAN TID 16
241. es close to zero However this behavior can be deactivated If Direct Path is set to Off the spectrum analyzer always uses the ana log mixer path Auto Default The direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to zero Off The analog mixer path is always used Remote command INPut DPATh on page 172 High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the analyzer in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires an additional hardware option DOCSIS 3 1 1 9 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Remote command INPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 173 YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YIG preselector if available on the R amp S FSW Note that the YIG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz There fore switching the YIG preselector on or off has no effect if the frequency is below that value Remote command INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 173 Digital Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the optional Digi tal Baseband Interface in the applications that support i
242. et Auto to Off then configure the Min and Max values for the y axis range e Set the Auto Mode to Memory and select the number of results to consider for rescaling Memory Depth e Set the Auto Mode to Hysteresis and define the percentage of the currently displayed value range to be used as Hysteresis Intervals for rescaling Optionally for automatic scaling define a fixed upper or lower limit for the y axis scale Auto Fix Range 25 Press the SWEEP key then select Refresh to update the result displays for the new settings without performing a new measurement 8 2 How to Analyze Modulation Accuracy and Signal Con tents for DOCSIS 3 1 Upstream Signals 1 Press the MODE key A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available on your R amp S FSW 2 Select the DOCSIS 3 1 item User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 134 How to Analyze Modulation Accuracy and Signal Contents for DOCSIS 3 1 Upstream Signals DOCSIS 3 1 The R amp S FSW opens new measurement channel for the DOCSIS 3 1 applica tion 3 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for a DOCSIS 3 1 mea surement 4 Select the Signal Description button to describe the expected input signal 5 Inthe OFDM Channel Description tab define the general OFDM channel trans mission settings including Stream direction Upstream OFDM spectrum location FFT length Cyclic prefi
243. etic level offset This offset is added to the measured level In some result displays the scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in mind the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference level displayed reference level offset Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet page 195 Unit Reference Level The R amp S FSW measures the signal voltage at the RF input In the default state the level is displayed at a power of 1 mW dBm Via the known input impedance 50 or 75 see Impedance on page 75 conversion to other units is possible The following units are available and directly convertible e dBm dBmV e dByV Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 174 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer on page 195 RF Attenuation Defines the attenuation applied to the RF input of the R amp S FSW Attenu
244. ex Indicates the continuous line number in the configuration table Remote command CONFigure US CHANnel ESUB lt i gt COUNt on page 162 Type Defines the type of special subcarrier Excluded Subcarrier that cannot be used because another type of service is Subcarrier using the subcarrier s frequency or a permanent ingressor is present on the frequency Remote command CONFigure US CHANnel ESUB i SUBCarrier TYPE on page 163 Subcarrier Range Start Increment Stop Defines a series of subcarriers to be configured identically The following restrictions apply e Start Stop Increment 2 1 For example to configure all 10 carriers between subcarriers 2044 and 2053 define e Start 2044 e Increment 1 e Stop 2053 Remote command CONFigure US CHANnel ESUB i SUBCarrier STARt on 163 CONFigure US CHANnel ESUB lt i gt SUBCarrier INCRement on page 162 CONFigure US CHANnel ESUB lt i gt SUBCarrier STOP on page 163 Subcarrier Set Specifies the discrete subcarrier numbers to be configured identically When you select the input field an edit dialog is displayed Enter the individual subcar rier numbers in the dialog selecting ENTER after each number To add further entry fields select Add DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Subcarrier Set xm 159 163 293 298 299 350 353 356 439 441 442 535 537 548 64
245. f origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right cor ner of the screen See figure 10 1 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically Range 0 to 100 Example LAY SPL 1 3 50 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Table to the center 50 of the screen i e in the fig ure above to the left Example LAY SPL 1 4 70 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Peak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any combination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically AY SPL 3 2 70 AY SPL 4 1 70 AY SPL 2 1 70 User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 220 Configuring the Result Display LAY out WINDow lt n gt ADD lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this com the suffix lt n gt determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command i
246. fied by the CONF igure MEXC SUBCarrier SET command are excluded RST OFF Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy Example CONF MEXC STAT USER CONF MEXC SUBC STAR 100 MEXC SUBC INCR 1 CONF MEXC SUBC STOP 105 The subcarriers 100 to 105 are excluded from MER calculation Manual operation See Excluding Subcarriers from MER Calculation on page 107 CONFigure MEXC SUBCarrier COUNt lt NoExclSC gt Defines the number of subcarriers to be excluded from MER calculation for CONFigure MEXC STATe on page 211 AUTO The subcarriers with the worst MER are automatically excluded from MER calculation Parameters lt NoExclSC gt integer Range 1 to 5 RST 5 Example CONF MEXC STAT AUTO CONF MEXC SUBC COUN 5 Manual operation See Excluding Subcarriers from MER Calculation on page 107 CONFigure MEXC SUBCarrier SET lt Subcarrier gt lt Subcarrier gt Defines a comma separated list of discrete subcarriers to be excluded from MER cal culation for CONFigure MEXC STATe on page 211 USER Parameters lt Subcarrier gt Subcarrier number Range 1 to 8191 Example CONF MEXC STAT USER CONF MEXC SUBC SET 100 105 112 123 134 145 Manual operation See Subcarrier Set on page 108 SENSe FRAMe COUNt Value If the statistic count is enabled see SENSe FRAMe COUNt STATe on page 213 the specified number of frames is taken
247. fines the magnitude the I Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV IQP 30DBM TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level the RF input must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered The input signal must be between 500 MHz and 8 GHz Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV RFP 30dBm TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe lt Type gt Parameters lt Type gt POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 97 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the trigger source Note on external triggers If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue Make sure this situation is avoided in y
248. follow During the trans mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite for mat requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 10 3 Activating DOCSIS 3 1 Measurements Activating DOCSIS 3 1 Measurements DOCSIS 3 1 measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW R amp S FSW K192 The measurement is started immediately with the default settings Bandwidth extension option required Both R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 applications require a bandwidth extension option for 320 MHz The R amp S FSW K193 option for DOCSIS 3 1 upstream signals requires the new bandwidth extension hardware R amp S FSW B320 11325 4867 04 The R amp S FSW K192 option for DOCSIS 3 1 downstream signals requires either the option R amp S FSW B320 1313 7172 02 or the new bandwidth extension hardware R amp S FSW B320 11325 4867 04 If the required options are not installed an error message is displayed and no mea surements can be performed with the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 applications These are basic R amp S FSW commands listed here for your convenience 145 INS Tr ment GREa
249. ge 26 See Diagram on page 29 See Result Summary on page 29 See Marker Peak List on page 30 For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Table 10 4 lt WindowType gt parameter values for DOCSIS application Parameter value Window type BITStream Bitstream CONStellation Constellation GDELay Group Delay MERCarrier MER vs Carrier MERSymbol MER vs Symbol RFMagnitude Magnitude Capture RF PSPectrum Power Spectrum MERSC MER vs Symbol X Carrier PCAR Power vs Carrier upstream only PSC Power vs Symbol X Carrier RSUMmary Result Summary SCDetailed Signal Content Detailed Configuring the Result Display Parameter value Window type SCSummary Signal Content Summary downstream only SFLatness Spectrum Flatness LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows in the active mea surement channel from top left to bottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt Return values lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Windowlndex numeric value Index of the window Example LAY CAT Result Two windows displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at
250. ger the CP must be This command describes the parameters for upstream signals For downstream sig nals see CONFigure CHANnel CP on page 151 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Parameters lt CyclicPrefix gt AUTO The length is determined automatically by the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application and indicated in the dialog box after the next measurement 596 Useful symbol period starts after 96 samples 0 9375 us 128 Useful symbol period starts after 128 samples or 1 25 us 160 Useful symbol period starts after 160 samples or 1 5625 us 192 Useful symbol period starts after 192 samples or 0 9375us 5224 Useful symbol period starts after 224 samples or 1 875 us 256 Useful symbol period starts after 256 samples or 2 5us 288 Useful symbol period starts after 288 samples or 2 8125 us 320 Useful symbol period starts after 320 samples or 3 125 us 5384 Useful symbol period starts after 384 samples 3 75 us 512 Useful symbol period starts after 512 samples or 5 0us 5640 Useful symbol period starts after 640 samples or 6 25 us RST AUTO Example CONF CHAN CP S192 Mode upstream Manual operation See Cyclic Prefix CP on page 67 CONFigure CHANnel ROFF lt RollOff gt upstream Defines the roll off period for the Tukey raised cosine window which is applied at the beginning and end of an OFDM symbol The required period depends on the channel bandwidth and the number
251. gnal The R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application provides an auto detection function to config ure the frames automatically from the signal In realistic DOCSIS 3 1 transmission scenario the transmitted data changes con In the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application you configure the assignment of codewords to symbols in a table The codewords are numbered consecutively from the first to the last OFDM symbol and from the first to last logical subcarrier see figure 4 3 For each codeword an entry in the table is required which assigns the first and total number of subcarriers per codeword or alternatively the first and total number of OFDM symbols Furthermore the profile that is modulation to be used for the code word is defined Note that since one OFDM symbol may contain more than one code word and each codeword may use a different modulation the same OFDM symbol may have a mixed modulation Physical vs logical subcarriers As described above the physical subcarriers in a DOCSIS 3 1 channel may contain general signal information PLC pilots useful data or unspecified data excluded car riers In order to improve modulation accuracy the data is not transmitted in consecutive subcarriers but scattered across all available subcarriers by subjecting it to time and frequency interleaving The time and frequency interleaved data together with the NCPs and PLCs are then distributed amoung all physical subcarriers wit
252. gt e xyz a valid Windows file name e Format complex polar or real see Format element e Channels Number of channels see NumberOfChannels element e Type float32 float64 int8 int16 int32 or int64 see DataType element Examples xyz complex 1ch float32 e xyz polar 1ch float64 e xyzreal 1ch int16 xyz complex 16ch int8 UserData Optional contains user application or device specific XML data which is not part of the iq tar specification This element can be used to store additional information e g the hardware configuration User data must be valid XML content PreviewData Optional contains further XML elements that provide a preview of the data The preview data is determined by the routine that saves an iq tar file e g R amp S FSW For the definition of this element refer to the RsIqTar xsd schema Note that the preview can be only displayed by current web browsers that have JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt is available Example ScalingFactor Data stored as in t16 and a desired full scale voltage of 1 V ScalingFactor 1 V maximum int16 value 1 V 215 3 0517578125e 5 V Scaling Factor Numerical value Numerical value x ScalingFac tor Minimum negative int16 value 215 32768 1V Maximum positive int16 value 215 1 32767 0 999969482421875 V Example PreviewData in
253. h exception of the excluded subcarriers and modulated according to the assigned profiles DOCSIS 3 1 Downstream Signal Processing b anman Palia D ater FO Fig 4 4 Relation between frames logical subcarriers profiles and physical subcarriers During demodulation the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application must restore the original time and frequency order of the information to form logical subcarriers with coherent data Demodulation and Analysis When demodulating the DOCSIS 3 1 signal the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application must restore the original correlation between the symbols in order to retrieve the blocks in the logical subcarriers and thus the useful information The continuous pilots and the PLC preamble help synchronize the time and phase information between symbols With the help of the frame codeword configuration the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 applica tion can demodulate the data in the logical subcarriers and restore the codewords As a result various signal characteristics modulation accuracy parameters and constella tion data are available The detailed signal content can also be output in a table The order of entries in this table is similar to the frame configuration table For each frame the CRC and the code words with the assigned NCP are listed in consecutive order of the codeword index For each object in the table modulation accuracy parameters the measured power
254. hapter 3 Measurements and Result Display on page 13 To close the SmartGrid mode and restore the previous softkey menu select the 22 Close icon in the righthand corner of the toolbar or press any key For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual DOCSIS 3 1 I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy Access MODE gt Docsis 3 1 Overview gt Select Measurement gt Modulation Accuracy When you activate the DOCSIS 3 1 application an measurement of the input signal is started automatically with the default configuration The DOCSIS 3 1 menu is dis played and provides access to the most important configuration functions The Span Bandwidth Lines and Marker Functions menus are not available for DOCSIS 3 1 I Q measurements Multiple access paths to functionality The easiest way to configure a measurement channel is via the Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any DOCSIS 3 1 soft key menu Overview Alternatively you can access the individual dialog boxes via softkeys from the corre sponding menus or via tools in the toolbars if available In this documentation only the most convenient method of accessing the dialog boxes is indicated usually via the Overview e Configuration nennen enn nnne nnns nnns 49 SONADAS onnon n ce ette tei oce er
255. have been made Remote command INITiate lt n gt REFResh page 234 Continue Single Sweep After triggering repeats the number of sweeps set in Sweep Count without deleting the trace of the last measurement DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 233 5 3 7 Parameter Estimation and Tracking Access Overview gt Estimation Tracking or MEAS CONFIG gt Parameter Estimation Tracking The channel estimation settings determine which channels are assumed in the input signal Tracking settings allow for compensation of some transmission effects in the signal n Tracking Parameter Estimation Channel Estimation Docsis 3 1 Downstream Definition Tracking Phase Time Channel 102 Phase Tracking downstream ccc tre ett Lettera terc ne dete 103 Timing Error Tracking conuertere mcer eek oce ce ia te 103 Channel Estimation The channel estimation settings determine how channels are detected and compensa ted for in the input signal DOCSIS 3 1 Downstream Definition Downstream only default An optimal channel estimation using all ava
256. he follow ing settings Table 5 3 Predefined settings for DOCSIS 3 1 CCDF measurements Setting Default value CCDF Active on trace 1 Analysis bandwidth 10 MHz Number of samples 62500 Detector Sample For further details about the CCDF measurements refer to Statistical Measurements in the R amp S FSW User Manual Frequency Sweep Measurements To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement e Reference level and reference level offset Analysis bandwidth Number of samples 6 1 Traces Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace and markers etc are currently not available for the standard DOCSIS 3 1 measurements Only one marker is available for these measurements Analysis of frequency sweep measurements General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers lines etc for RF mea surements are identical to the analysis functions in the Spectrum application except for some special marker functions and spectrograms which are not available in the DOCSIS 3 1 application For details see the Common Analysis and Display Functions chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 10 10 Analysis on page 259 6 122
257. he information for each symbol in the order of the logical subcarriers is provi ded with one row each for Retrieving Results Downstream e NCPs e Codewords Upstream e Minislot sets Tip The FETCh SCSummary ALL command returns the summarized information for the NCPs and codewords contained in the downstream input signal For details on individual parameters see chapter 3 1 2 Signal Content Information on page 14 Return values lt CW_Index gt integer 0 1535 nan Codeword index Not available nan for PLC pilots and excluded subcarriers lt SymStart gt integer 0 127 nan OFDM symbol Not available nan for PLC pilots and excluded subcarriers Object Modulation MER Power lt Subcarrier gt lt LDPC_ITER gt Retrieving Results Information type nan Invalid data PIL Pilots PLCP PLC Preamble downstream only PLCD PLC Data downstream only EXCL Excluded subcarrier NCPCWA NCPCWP NCP Codeword A P downstream only NCPC24 NCP CRC 24 downstream only NCPN NCP Null downstream only CWA CWP Codeword A P downstream only CW Codeword upstream only minislot set CPIL Compl pilot upstream only BPSK QPSK QAM16 QAM64 QAM128 QAM256 QAM512 QAM1024 QAM2048 QAM4096 QAM8192 QAM16384 NONE MIXED Modulation see Modulation on page 63 Modulation error ratio in dB Power in dBm integer
258. he output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters Level HIGH TTL signal LOW OV RST LOW Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 86 See Level on page 86 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe lt OutputT ype gt This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters lt OutputType gt DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R amp S FSW has triggered inter nally TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal For more information see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel RST DEVice Manual operation See Output on page 86 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate This command generates a pulse at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Usage Event Manual operation See Send Trigger on page 87 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth lt Length gt This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3
259. ice PMETer p CONFigure AUTO STATe 181 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer 181 5 lt gt 181 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt CONFigure AUTO STATe lt State gt This command turns automatic assignment of a power sensor to the power sensor index on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Parameters lt State gt OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET CONF AUTO OFF Manual operation See Select on page 81 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNt This command queries the number of power sensors currently connected to the R amp S FSW Parameters lt NumberSensors gt Number of connected power sensors Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET COUN Usage Query only Manual operation See Select on page 81 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt DEFine Placeholder Type Interface lt SerialNo gt This command assigns the power sensor with the specified serial number to the selected power sensor index configuration The query returns the power sensor type and serial number of the sensor assigned to the specified index Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Setting parameters lt
260. ied tices eerte eee tree tes 127 Configuration remote 259 Config rilig rettet etri 125 Configuring softkey 4422212 124 D activating 127 J lta eei cede 127 MER vs Symbol X Carrier 22 125 Power vs Symbol X Carrier 23 125 Querying position remote 261 262 jr 126 Eoo 128 Table evaluation method 20 30 terere Hee retia aree PE aaa 127 Maximizing Windows remote seen 215 Maximum bei CP 117 Measurement channel Creating remote Deleting remote Duplicating remote eene Querying remote entero Renaming remote Replacing remote Selecting remote 44242 222 Measurement time Power Sensor tien eines dett 82 Measurements FrequeriCy SWe6p ec ertet 27 RF results Ha TYPOS Selecting Selecting remote Starting remote MER vs Carrier Result display vs Symbol Result display m vs Symbol trace data vs Symbol X Carrier markers vs Symbol X Carrier Result display vs Symbol X Carri
261. ier can use a different modulation allowing for higher data rates where transmission conditions are good and reliable data reception where they are poor Time and frequency interleaving methods as well as forward error correction FEC and cyclic redundancy correction bits ensure low error rates and high modula tion accuracy Using DOCSIS 3 1 the same data is sent to multiple cable modems in data blocks containing information on which contents need to be decoded by the individual modems DOCSIS 3 1 Downstream Signal Processing Downstream DOCSIS 3 1 signals are used to transmit data from the cable modem ter mination system CMTS to numerous individual cable modems in widely spread loca tions The R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 applications analyze both types of signals based on DOCSIS 3 1 R amp S FSW K192 K193 Measurement Basics The following graphic illustrates the basic signal processing performed by the applica tion for downstream signals The individual steps are then described in more detail Continuous Pitots OFDM Channel Description Excluded Subcarrier Assignment Profile Configuration Determine excluded Encoded subcarriers detect i i Remove cyclic Perform FFT for ti ilot pemoduiate daia input signal continuous pilots in each physical prefix and roll off each OFDM gt and PLC RS according to period symbol reverse time and assigned profile
262. iers may exist In the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application profiles for upstream signals contain the assignment of the pilot pattern and modulation per minislot or for a number of minislots as opposed to the modulation subcarrier assignment for downstream signals Only a single profile is configurable for upstream signals in the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 appli cation Pilot patterns As described above pilot patterns differ by the number of pilots in a minislot and by their arrangement within the minislot Which patterns are available for a minislot depends on the number of subcarriers and thus the FFT mode For 2K mode 8 subcarriers per minislot 8 different pilot patterns are available defined in the DOCSIS 3 1 specification 2 In each figure the horizontal axis represents OFDMA symbols and the vertical axis represents the subcarriers Each square in a figure represents a subcarrier at a spe cific symbol time Pilots are designated by P and complementary pilots by CP All other subcarriers carry data with the modulation order of the minislot The figures show patterns for K between 6 and 16 For K gt 16 the complementary pilots are always located in the 14th and 16th symbols all symbols from the 17th symbol to the end of the frame carry data only Pilot locations are the same for any K User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 38 DOCSIS 3 1 Upstream Signal Processing Body minisiots Edge minislots Figure 7 37
263. ignals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l Off and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q Remote command SENSe SWAPiq on page 199 Filter Adjacent Channels downstream only If activated only the useful signal is analyzed signal data in adjacent channels is fil tered out as much as possible This setting is only available for DOCSIS 3 1 downstream measurements This setting improves the signal to noise ratio and thus the MER results for signals with strong or a large number of adjacent channels In particular the filter is required for MER tests according to the DOCSIS 3 1 Physical Layer Acceptance Test Plan see 3 However for some measurements information on the effects of adjacent channels on the measured signal may be of interest Remote command INPut FILTer ACHannels STATe on page 198 DOCSIS 3 111 Measurement Modulation Accuracy 5 3 6 Sweep Settings Access SWEEP The sweep settings define how the data is measured Continuous Sweep RUN CONT ccccccscscsssssssecesssssseesssessnseeessessnsecseesstseeesesssneeess 101 single Sweep RUN SINGLE jase edle ee eR n 101 acc 101 Continue Single SWegDp aeo e ER edendo dece Seta dex DENM 101 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running me
264. ilable pilots is performed as defined in the DOCSIS 3 1 down stream standard Off Downstream only The channel transfer function is not compensated for in the measurement results Equalized MER Upstream only default Measurements with linear distortions are equalized by the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application equalizer DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Unequalized MER Upstream only Measurements with linear distortions are not equal ized by the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application equalizer Only one carrier amplitude adjustment common for all subcarriers and OFDM symbols in the burst is performed Only one timing adjustment is performed resulting in phase ramp across subcarriers Partial Equalization Upstream only Partial equalization according to the definition in the standardization document ATP TC 1409 4 Procedure 3 1 The partial equalizer is configured such that it does not correct components of the cable modem s impulse response that are longer than 200 ns Remote command SENSe CHANnel ESTimation on page 208 Phase Tracking downstream only Activates or deactivates the compensation for phase drifts If activated the measure ment results are compensated for phase drifts on a per symbol basis Remote command SENSe TRACking PHASe on page 208 Timing Error Tracking Activates or deactivates the compensation for timing drift If activated the measure ment results are compensat
265. in the active measurement channel use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 216 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout SPLitter lt Index1 gt lt Index2 gt lt Position gt This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the win dows on each side of the splitter Compared to the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE on page 215 command the LAYout SPLitter changes the size of all windows to either side of the splitter per manently it does not just maximize a single window temporarily Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define con flicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows the command will not work but does not return an error R amp S FSW K192 K193 Remote Commands for DOCSIS 3 1 Measurements y 100 x 100 y 100 1 01 GHz 102 12 dim x 0 y 0 x 100 Fig 10 1 SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Parameters lt Index1 gt The index of one window the splitter controls Index2 The index of a window on the other side of the splitter Position New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area without channel and status bar and softkey menu The point o
266. ion is iq tar By default the contents of the file are in 32 bit floating point format Secure User Mode Analysis In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 R_S Instr user data igq tar Stores the captured data to the specified file 10 10 Analysis The following commands define general result analysis settings concerning the traces and markers in standard DOCSIS 3 1 measurements Currently only one Clear Write trace and one marker are available for standard DOCSIS 3 1 measurements Analysis for RF measurements General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers lines etc for RF mea surements are identical to the analysis functions in the Spectrum application except for some special marker functions and spectrograms which are not available in the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application For details see the General Measurement Analysis and Display chapter in the R
267. irit re tr ertt cete t Ere ER e n 190 SENSE PME Lersp gt TRIGGEIESTALC cce cierto nun eae Ehre 191 SENSe PMETersp UPDate STATS eene ne rte ct rere nnne rra ree inh eh retain 188 SENSe PMETer lt p gt STATe ISENS J SUB Carmien SELEG nua a I ge EU SENSe ISWAPIQ eec ER ED Ro EEA ENES SENSe SWEep LENGI rene rrr te 199 T 200 SENSe S YMBol SEL6CtL 5 ttt tro re e 225 SENSe see also SENSE commaridsl decetero eee t ere to cb eaa 208 M 232 CALCulate lt n gt DEL Tamarker lt m gt iMREF rire tiennent 260 CAL Culatesn gt DEL l amarke rsin s X rero ptite n eee knee bra e irrati 260 CALCulatesn DELTamarkersms ES DAT rcr mr eie tov Y cue eae tes ek orb CALCulate lt n gt LIMit SUMMary CERRor MAXimum RESult lt gt 11 4 5 248 lt gt 11 4 5 2 250 lt gt 11 4 5
268. late lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 252 Markers Y value Defines the position of the marker on the y axis symbol for 3 dimensional result dis plays MER vs Symbol X Carrier Power vs Symbol X Carrier Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 262 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 261 Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci fied reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on 261 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe page 260 Reference Marker Defines a marker as the reference marker which is used to determine relative analysis results delta marker values If the reference marker is deactivated the delta marker referring to it is also deactiva ted Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF on page 260 Assigning the Marker to a Trace The Tr
269. lation diagram is displayed for all detected subcarriers Remote command SENSe SUBCarrier SELect on page 224 DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Symbol The constellation diagram is restricted to the specified symbol If All is selected the Constellation diagram is displayed for all symbols Remote command SENSe SYMBol SELect on page 225 Display Settings for Carrier Based Results Access Overview 2 Result Config gt Display Settings or MEAS CONFIG gt Result Config gt Display Settings The following settings are available for carrier based result displays such as MER vs Carrier Markers Marker Settings Display Settings Y Scaling Carrier Axes Hertz 177 137 4 MER vs Carrier t Fig 5 12 Result configuration settings for carrier based results Camer Axes Dit ers sa de etra 113 Carrier Axes Unit For result displays that evaluate a parameter per carrier e g MER vs Carrier Group Delay or Spectrum Flatness you can define whether the carrier number or the carrier frequency in Hz is displayed on the x axis Note however that this setting applies to ALL result displays based on carriers Remote command UNIT CAXes on page 231 Display Settings for Bitstream Results Access Overview z Result Config Display Settings or MEAS CONFIG gt Result Config gt Display Settings The following settings are available for
270. ld correspond to an I Q sam ple with the magnitude 1 If Auto is selected the level is automatically set to the value provided by the connec ted device Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 177 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT on page 177 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO on page 176 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level If enabled the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change occurs Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 177 Connected Instrument Displays the status of the Digital Baseband Interface connection If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed Name and serial number of the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Inter face Used port e Sample rate of the data currently being transferred via the Digital Baseband Inter face e Level and unit that corresponds to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 Full Scale Level if provided by connected instrument Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 175 DOCSIS 3 1 I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy Analog Baseband Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the optional Ana log Baseband Interface in the applications that support it They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box Input Settings Frequency Digital IQ 1 0 Mode Input Config Analog Baseband gt e 5 High Ac
271. leaved complex sam ples for channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 etc If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is presumed Example Element order for real data 1 channel 1101 Real sample 0 I 1 Real sample 1 I 2 Real sample 2 Data File Format iq tar Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel I 0 0101 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 0 I 1 0111 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 1 1 21 0121 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex polar data 1 channel Mag 0 Phi 0 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 0 Mag 1 Phi l Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 1 Mag 2 Phi 2 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 3 channels Complex data I channel no time index Q channel no time index 01101 0101101 Channel 0 Complex sample 0 11101 0111101 Channel 1 Complex sample 0 21101 0121101 Channel 2 Complex sample 0 01111 0101111 Channel 0 Complex sample 1 11111 911111 Channel 1 Complex sample 1 23 E315 Channel 2 Complex sample 1 01121 0101121 Channel 0 Complex sample 2 11121 911112 Channel 1 Complex sample 2 21121 0121121 Channel 2 Complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel This example demon
272. lect Measurement gt Modulation Accuracy The default DOCSIS 3 1 I Q measurement captures the I Q data from the DOCSIS 3 1 signal using a nearly rectangular filter with a relatively large bandwidth The I Q data captured with this filter includes magnitude and phase information which allows the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application to demodulate broadband signals and determine various characteristic signal parameters such as the modulation accuracy spectrum flatness center frequency tolerance and symbol clock tolerance in just one measure ment Other parameters specified in the DOCSIS 3 1 standard require a better signal to noise level or a smaller bandwidth filter than the measurement provides and must be determined in separate measurements see chapter 3 2 Frequency Sweep Mea surements on page 27 e Modulation Accuracy 13 e Signal Content 14 e Evaluation Methods for DOCSIS 3 1 I Q 16 3 1 4 Modulation Accuracy Parameters The default DOCSIS 3 1 I Q measurement Modulation Accuracy captures the data from the DOCSIS 3 1 signal and determines all the following I Q parameters in a single sweep Table 3 1 DOCSIS 3 1 Modulation Accuracy Parameters Parameter Keyword for Unit Description remote com mand
273. llation diagram is displayed for all symbols RST ALL Example SYMB SEL 7 Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Constellation on page 18 See Symbol on page 113 Configuring Scaling and Units The following commands are required to configure the scaling for DOCSIS 3 1 I Q measurement results in a remote environment The corresponding tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 5 3 10 3 Y Scaling Settings on page 114 lt gt lt gt 5 225 lt gt lt gt 226 DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis LOWer UPPer 226 DISPlay WINDow N TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis LOWer LOWer 227 DISPlay WINDow N TRACe st Y SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis UPPer LOWer 227 DISPlay WINDow N TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis UPPer UPPer 227 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO MEMory DEPTh sess 228 lt gt lt gt 228 9 lt gt lt gt 1
274. lute power sensor measurements lt gt is irrele vant Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Unit gt DBM WATT W RST DBM Example UNIT PMET POW DBM Manual operation See Unit Scale on page 82 UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer RATio Unit This command selects the unit for relative power sensor measurements lt gt is irrele vant Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy Parameters lt Unit gt DB PCT RST DB Example UNIT PMET POW RAT DB Manual operation See Unit Scale on page 82 Triggering with Power Sensors gt 222022 189 SENSeJPMETersps TRIGgerFOLbol 2 esaciedegedecexavaelaacebadaaadeeigedsanetmsesdetgnnaaads 189 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger HYSTeresis cessisse 190 SENSE PME Tere p gt TRIGGER EVO itat rr pottea retinent gatur ettet eee 190 SENSe PMETer p TRIGget SLOBe 2 1 irato er eec ine eicit anco d inopes o Eod Roe 190 lt gt 191 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger DTIMe lt gt This command defines the time period that the input signal has to stay below the IF power trigger level before the measurement starts Suffix lt p gt 1
275. ly available if a window with additional settings is currently selected Inthe Overview select a window with a graphical result from the Specifics for selection list then select the Result Configuration button Display Settings for Constellation 111 Display Settings for Carrier Based 113 Display Settings for Bitstream 4 4 42 2 113 Display Settings for Constellation Results Access Overview 2 Result Config gt Display Settings or MEAS CONFIG gt Result Config gt Display Settings The following settings are available for Constellation result displays Result Configuration Display Settings Modulation 2 Subcarrier All Fig 5 10 Result configuration settings for Constellation results 111 112 dota 112 5 113 Object The constellation diagram is restricted to the specified object DOCSIS 3 111 Measurement Modulation Accuracy If All is selected default the Constellation diagram is displayed for the following objects Pilots Complementary Pilots upstream only
276. mentary cumulative distribution function measurement determines the distribution of the signal amplitudes The measurement captures a user definable amount of samples and calculates their mean power As a result the probability that a sample s power is higher than the calculated mean power x dB is displayed The crest factor is displayed in the Result Summary For details see chapter 5 4 2 CCDF on page 120 E User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 28 R amp S FSW K192 K193 Measurements and Result Display Ref Level 0 50 dBm AnBW 40 MHz 948 Meas Time 12 5 ms CF 100 0 MHz Mean Pwr 20 00 dB 2 Result Summary Samples 500000 Mean Peak Crest 1 0 1 1 7 22 dBm 3 34 dBm 10 56 dB E 0 01 Fig 3 4 measurement results Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe on page 150 Querying results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 261 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics RESult lt t gt on page 252 3 2 2 Evaluation Methods for Frequency Sweep Measurements The evaluation methods for frequency sweep measurements in the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application are identical to those in the R amp S FSW base unit Spectrum application LIT Te ANN 29 Result 29 Maiker TaBe Eme ER eR ad ERE 30 Marker Peak
277. mmand sets the level of the baseband power trigger This command is available for the optional Digital Baseband Interface and the optional Analog Baseband Interface Parameters lt Level gt Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV BBP 30DBM TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on front panel 3 trigger port 3 TRIGGER3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on rear panel Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 35V RST 1 4 V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 96 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 10 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command de
278. mote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 193 OFDM Spectrum Location Specifies the center frequency in Hz of the subcarrier 0 of the OFDM channel which defines the beginning of the OFDM spectrum The default value for this setting is derived from the current Center frequency If the spectrum location is changed the center frequency is adapted accordingly and vice versa Remote command CONFigure DS CHANnel SPECtrum FREQuency on page 155 Ner FFT length Specifies the length of the FFT defining the OFDM transmission which corresponds to the number of phsyical subcarriers 2K mode Af 50 kHz 2048 subcarriers at 50 kHz spacing FFT length 2048 samples 4K mode Af 25 kHz 4096 subcarriers at 25 kHz spacing FFT length 4096 samples Remote command CONFigure CHANnel NFFT on page 152 Cyclic Prefix CP Length of the configurable cyclic prefix The cyclic prefix determines where the useful data starts and allows the application to detect delay spreads during transmission The longer the delay spread the longer the CP must be Note The cyclic prefix must be longer than the Roll off period AUTO The length is determined automatically by the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application and indicated in the dialog box after the next measure ment 96 Samples Useful symbol period starts after 96 samples or 0 9375 us 0 9375us 128 Samples Useful symbol period starts after 128 samples or 1 25 us 1 25ys
279. n Indicates the used PLC modulation for reference only 16QAM modulation is required by the DOCSIS 3 1 standard Remote command CONFigure DS CHANnel PLC MODulation on page 155 PLC Number of Subcarriers N Indicates the number of subcarriers used by the PLC for reference only The number of subcarriers depends on the FFT length setting Remote command CONFigure DS CHANnel PLC CARRiers on page 154 NCP Modulation Defines the modulation used by the Next Codeword Pointer NCP The following modulation types are supported e QPSK e 16 QAM e 64 QAM Remote command CONFigure DS CHANnel NCP MODulation on page 153 Continuous Pilots and Excluded Subcarrier Assignment Access Overview gt Signal Description gt OFDM Channel Description gt Continu ous Pilots Excluded Subcarriers Configuration or MEAS CONFIG gt Signal Description gt OFDM Channel Description gt Continu ous Pilots Excluded Subcarriers Configuration Some subcarriers have a specific function and are used identically for all symbols Such fixed objects in the channel must be configured so that the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application can distinguish their contents from the useful data Subcarriers with a special function are configured in the signal description in the Continuous Pilots and Excluded Subcarrier Assignment table For downstream signals the first row contains the PLC and is configured automatically acco
280. n a configuration for at least one subcarrier are considered to be active indicated by black text Empty profiles are inactive indicated by gray text Remote command CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig i SELect on page 165 Edit Profile Displays the Modulation Subcarrier Assignment dialog box for the selected profile For details see Profile Settings Modulation Subcarrier Assignment on page 63 DOCSIS 3 111 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Delete Profile Deletes the currently selected profile in the Modulation Subcarrier Assignment list Profile Settings Modulation Subcarrier Assignment Access Overview gt Signal Description gt Profile Configuration gt Edit Profile or MEAS CONFIG gt Signal Description gt Profile Configuration gt Edit Profile Set BJEK IE 63 Modula HOM 63 Start Ineremenb 63 SUbCaTTIer Sohe dpa ARR 64 o P 64 es etur e 64 hips c 64 E 65 we 65 C M MCN 65 CANCE c 65 Set Index Continuous line number in configuration table Remote command CONFig
281. n page 106 10 6 Configuring Frequency Sweep Measurements on DOCSIS 3 1 Signals The R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application uses the functionality of the R amp S FSW base system Spectrum application see the R amp S FSW User Manual to perform the DOCSIS 3 1 frequency sweep measurements The R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application automatically sets the parameters to predefined settings as described in chapter 10 6 Configuring Frequency Sweep Measurements on DOCSIS 3 1 Signals on page 214 The DOCSIS 3 1 RF measurements must be activated for a measurement channel in the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application see chapter 10 3 Activating DOCSIS 3 1 Measurements on page 145 For details on configuring these RF measurements in a remote environment see the Remote Commands chapter of the R amp S FSW User Manual 10 7 10 7 1 Configuring the Result Display Configuring the Result Display The following commands are required to configure the screen display in DOCSIS 3 1 measurements a remote environment The corresponding tasks for manual oper ation are described in chapter 5 2 Display Configuration on page 47 The suffix lt n gt in the following remote commands represents the window 1 16 in the currently selected measurement channel e General Window Commands E Eee bed Lester ri 215 e Working with Windows the 216 e Configuring Specific Result Dis
282. nal Analog Baseband Interface The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification A refer ence level offset if defined is also considered For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet Remote command TRIG SOUR see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 204 RF Power Trigger Source Trigger Source Settings Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the displayed measurement range For this purpose the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate fre quency The input signal must be in the frequency range between 500 MHz and 8 GHz The resulting trigger level at the RF input depends on the RF attenuation and preampli fication For details on available trigger levels see the instrument s data sheet Note If the input signal contains frequencies outside of this range e g for fullspan measurements the measurement may be aborted and a message indicating the allowed input frequencies is displayed in the status bar A Trigger Offset Trigger Polarity and Trigger Holdoff to improve the trigger stabil ity can be defined for the RF trigger but no Hysteresis This trigger source is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Inter face or the optional Analog Baseband Interface If the trigger source RF Power is selected and digital or analog baseband input is activated the trigger s
283. nd B71 remote control 179 Digital 1 Q Digital 1 Q remote 176 177 Unit digital remote 177 G Group delay Trace data in peer ties 256 Group Delay Result display neri tete terns 19 H Hardware settings DISPLAY OG 11 High pass filter Remote cce oe o e reni dee ride ele Les MR 173 REIDDU 2 5 ortis riora rre kx 75 Hysteresis TWIG QS idco e aae Trigger Power sensor ua data Export file binary data description 280 Export file parameter description 277 Exporting Exporting remote Importing eee Importing remote eee Importing Exporting measurements Configuring remote eee 151 1 Q Power TAJJET 95 Trigger level remote 204 IF frequency 43 85 Output remote IF Qut Erequeroy terre materni then 85 gie ier H 85 REMOTE M 192 IF Power Rm A M Trigger level remote IF VIDEO DEMOD CONMOCION 43 85 Impedance aci M 174 Setting Importing VO inte ote te 73 130 277 VQ data remote dettes 258 Input Analog Bas
284. nds for DOCSIS 3 1 Measurements Remote commands required to configure and perform DOCSIS 3 1 measurements in a remote environment sorted by tasks Commands required to set up the environment or to perform common tasks on the instrument are provided in the main R amp S FSW User Manual Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes Annex Reference material List of remote commands Alphahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual Index User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 5 Documentation Overview 1 2 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSW consists of the following parts e Printed Getting Started manual e Online Help system on the instrument e Documentation DVD with Getting Started User Manuals for base unit and firmware applications Service Manual Release Notes Data sheet and product brochures Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming Online help is available using the 2 icon on the toolbar of the R amp S FSW Web Help The web help provides online access to the complete information on operating the R amp S FSW and all available options without downloading The content of the web help corresponds to the user manuals for the latest product version The we
285. ning the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only Reading Out the CONDition Part STATus OPERation CONDition STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only Controlling the ENABle Part STATus OPERation ENABle lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Programming Examples for DOCSIS 3 1 Measurements 10 11 2 5 Controlling the Negative Transi
286. nput signal at the BASEBAND INPUT Q connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband Q If a center frequency greater than O Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF Q Remote command INPut IQ TYPE on page 179 Input Configuration Defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all four Analog Base band connectors or as a plain signal via two simple ended lines Note Both single ended and differential probes are supported as input however since only one connector is occupied by a probe the Single ended setting must be used for all probes Single Ended l Q data only Differential 1 Q and inverse data Not available for R amp S FSW85 Remote command INPut IQ BALanced STATe on page 178 High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF Activates a mode with enhanced timing accuracy between analog baseband RF and external trigger signals Note Prerequisites for previous models of R amp S FSW For R amp S FSW models with a serial number lower than 103000 special prerequisites and restrictions apply for high accuracy timing To obtain this high timing precision trigger port 1 and port 2 must be connected via the Cable for High Accuracy Timing order number 1325 3777 00 e As trigger port 1 and port 2 ar
287. nt two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Introduction Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 10 2 6 3 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 10 2 2 Long and Short Form on page 141 Querying text parameters When you query text parameters the system returns its short form Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM 10 2 6 4 Character Strings Strings are alphanumeric characters They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum 10 2 6 5 Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes
288. ntly displayed value range on the y axis An upper hysteresis interval is defined for the maximum value a lower hysteresis interval is defined for the minimum value See Hysteresis Interval Upper Lower Memory If the minimum or maximum values of the current measurement exceed the minimum or maximum of the lt x gt previous results respectively the axis is rescaled The minimum and maximum value of each measurement are added to the memory After lt x gt measurements the oldest results in the memory are overwritten by each new measurement The number lt x gt of results in the memory to be considered is configu rable see Memory Depth Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO MODE on page 228 Auto Fix Range This command defines the use of fixed value limits None Both the upper and lower limits are determined by automatic scaling of the y axis Lower The lower limit is fixed defined by the Minimum Maximum settings while the upper limit is determined by automatic scaling of the y axis Upper The upper limit is fixed defined by the Minimum Maximum settings while the lower limit is determined by automatic scaling of the y axis Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO FIXed RANGe on page 226 Hysteresis Interval Upper Lower For automatic scaling based on hysteresis the hysteresis intervals are defined here Depending on whether eithe
289. nts caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 202 Trigger Holdoff Trigger Source Settings Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 202 Slope Trigger Source Settings For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 204 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW Trigger input parameters are available in the Trigger dialog box Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger l
290. odeword Minislot set 7 NCP All 8 Profile 9 Compl Pilots 10 The value in parentheses is returned in remote operation Modulation Modulation see Modulation on page 63 MER dB Modulation error ratio in dB Power Power unit depends on Unit setting Upstream only Minislots Number of minislots Downstream only DOCSIS 3 11 Measurement Column Description count Signal Content Summary only For the PLC preamble and PLC data the number of detected objects of this type since one of these types is always in each frame the count equals the number of ana lyzed frames For the NCPs the number of NCPs evaluated for the results For the profiles the number of codewords of that profile Hsc Number of subcarriers LDPC Low density parity check Iterations Number of iterations Note that PLC and NCP decoding may need up to 2 iterations even if no bit errors occurred since parts of the codewords are not transmitted puncturing LDPC Low density parity check BitErr Pre Absolute number of bit errors before decoding BER Pre Bit error ratio before decoding the ratio of errored bits to the total number of transmit ted bits LDPC Low density parity check BitErr Post Absolute number of bit errors after decoding BER Post Bit error rate after decoding the ratio of falsely decoded bits to the total number of transmitted bits LDPC Low density parity check CWErr
291. odulation Accuracy on page 271 See Auto Mode on page 115 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe DIVisions lt NoDivisions gt Defines the number of divisions to be used for the y axis in the specified window Separate division settings can be configured for individual result displays Parameters lt NoDivisions gt Example Example Manual operation DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL DIV 10 For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 See Number of Divisions on page 117 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum Max Defines the maximum value to be displayed on the y axis of the specified evaluation diagram For automatic scaling with a fixed range see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt vy SCALe AUTO FIXed RANGe on page 226 the maximum defines the fixed upper limit Configuring the Result Display Suffix lt n gt 1 n lt gt 1 n Parameters Max Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL MAX 100 Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Minimum Maximum on page 117 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum Min Defines the minimum value to be displayed on the y axis of the specified evaluation diagram For automatic scaling with a fixed range see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe
292. of excluded carriers within the channel The larger the roll off period the more time transmission takes however the more useful subcarriers are available in the frequency domain This command describes the parameters for upstream signals For downstream sig nals see CONFigure CHANnel ROFF on page 153 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy Parameters lt RollOff gt AMRO The maximum possible roll off period is used automatically 50 samples in the roll off period for no transmit windowing 32 The roll off period contains 64 samples and lasts 0 3125 us 564 The roll off period contains 128 samples and lasts 0 625 us S96 The roll off period contains 192 samples and lasts 0 9375 us 128 The roll off period contains 256 samples and lasts 1 25 us 160 The roll off period contains 256 samples and lasts 1 25 ys 192 The roll off period contains 256 samples and lasts 1 25 ys 224 The roll off period contains 256 samples and lasts 1 25 us RST AMRO Example CONF CHAN ROFF S64 Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 CONFigure US CHANnel SYMBols lt SymbolsPerFrame gt Defines the number of symbols per frame to be expected Setting parameters lt SymbolsPerFrame gt The number of symbols per frame varies depending on the used bandwidth and Nee FFT length Range 2K mode 6 to 36 4K mode 6 to 18 Example CONF
293. of the currently displayed value range on the y axis Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y AUTO HYST UPP LOW 25 Manual operation See Hysteresis Interval Upper Lower on page 116 DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis UPPer UPPer lt Value gt For automatic scaling based on hysteresis this command defines the upper limit of the upper hysteresis interval If the maximum value in the current measurement exceeds this limit the y axis is rescaled automatically Configuring the Result Display For details see Hysteresis Interval Upper Lower on page 116 Parameters lt Value gt Percentage of the currently displayed value range on the y axis Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y AUTO HYST UPP UPP 20 Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Hysteresis Interval Upper Lower on page 116 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO MEMory DEPTh lt gt For automatic scaling based on memory this value defines the number lt x gt of previous results to be considered when determining if rescaling is required The minimum and maximum value of each measurement are added to the memory After lt x gt measurements the oldest results in the memory are overwritten by each new measurement For details see Auto Mode on page 115 Parameters lt NoMeas gt integer value Number of measurement results
294. ol in an OFDM channel that are available for useful data that is to transmit the codewords are called logical subcarriers Logical subcarri ers are combined in a frame The codewords are assigned to the next available symbol in the order they are sent If more subcarriers are required than are still empty subcarriers in the next symbol are assigned to the block as well Up to four consecutive symbols can be used by any one codeword Therefore it is necessary to document the assignment of codewords to sym bols For each new codeword that starts in a symbol the first subcarrier of the codeword is provided as a Next Codeword Pointer NCP The NCPs are also included in the frame NCPs are modulated using QPSK 16 QAM or 64 QAM Which modulation is used for the NCP is indicated by the PLC Finally for error protection each frame contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC block based on all NCPs in the frame Logical subcarrier 0 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 127 Symbols gt Fig 4 3 Frame codeword configuration of the logical subcarriers DOCSIS 3 1 Downstream Signal Processing Frame configuration in the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application stantly Thus the frame configuration also changes accordingly However for analysis and test purposes it is assumed that you use the same input signal to the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application for a specific test scenario and thus the frame configuration need only be configured once for that si
295. om pressed and thus it is possible to read the data directly within the archive without the need to unpack untar the tar file first Contained files An iq tar file must contain the following files Q parameter XML file e g 2 1 2 1 Q Data File Format iq tar Contains meta information about the data e g sample rate The filename can be defined freely but there must be only one single I Q parameter XML file inside an iq tar file e Q data binary file e g xyz complex f10oat32 Contains the binary data of all channels There must be only one single data binary file inside an iq tar file Optionally an iq tar file can contain the following file preview XSLT file e g open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt Contains a stylesheet to display the parameter XML file and a preview of the data in a web browser A sample stylesheet is available at http www rohde schwarz com file open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt Parameter XML File Specification The content of the parameter XML file must comply with the XML schema RsIqTar xsd available at http www rohde schwarz com file RslqTar xsd In particular the order of the XML elements must be respected i e iq tar uses an ordered XML schema For your own implementation of the iq tar file format make sure to validate your XML file against the given schema The following example shows an
296. ommands used to retrieve the numeric results for RF data the suf fixes n for CALCulate and lt k gt for LIMit are irrelevant 22222 deside estesa loss eium nece 251 lt gt lt gt 251 gt 252 lt gt 5 gt 1 2 1 100 saa san sa A dna Dann 252 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL This command queries the result of a limit check To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 233 Return values lt Result gt 0 PASS 1 FAIL Example INIT WAI Starts a new sweep and waits for its end CALC LIM3 FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 3 Usage Query only SCPI confirmed CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult lt gt This command queries the results of power measurements lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Query parameters lt Me
297. on is changed then the general center fre quency is also changed and vice versa Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 193 DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased using the arrow keys When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of only 1 10 of the Center Frequency Stepsize The step size can be coupled to another value or it can be manually set to a fixed value Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency The used value is indicated in the Value field Manual Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 193 Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no effect on the instrument s hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute fre quency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup for example The allowed values rang
298. onal keywords are emphasized with square brackets Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 10 2 5 Alternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for a specific keyword You can use both key words to the same effect Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short form without optional keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ 10 2 6 SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command supports more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle Parameters may have different forms of values 143 6 55 55 E 143 pe tb AN E TRAIT HERR 144 tete 144 Uerum 144 10 2 6 1 10 2 6 2 Introduction Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quantities you can also add the unit
299. onfigure basic DOCSIS measurements in a remote environment Note that some commands described in the examples may not actually be necessary as the default settings are used however they are included to demonstrate the use of the commands e Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation 271 e Measurement 2 Determining the Occupied 275 10 12 1 Programming Examples for DOCSIS 3 1 Measurements Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy This example demonstrates how to configure a modulation accuracy measurement in a remote environment a a Preparing the application Preset the instrument RST Activate a DOCSIS measurement channel INST SEL DOCS Configuring the measurement Set the center frequency FREQ CENT 1 0GHZ Signal description Define the OFDM spectrum location frequency of 0 at 897 6 MHz CONF DS CHAN SPEC FREQ 897600000 Nfft mode is 4K CONF CHAN NFFT FFT4K Configure the cyclic prefix to be 256 samples CONF CHAN CP 5256 Configure roll off factor of 64 samples CONF CHAN ROFF S64 Time interleaving depth is 16 CONF DS CHAN TID 16 NCP uses 16 QAM modulation CONF DS CHAN NCP MOD QAM16 Set PLC start index to 2044 manually CONF DS CHAN PLC IND AUTO OFF CONF DS CHAN PLC IND 2044 Query the used
300. operation See Constellation on page 18 See Group Delay on page 19 See Magnitude Capture on page 19 See MER vs Carrier on page 20 See MER vs Symbo on page 21 See MER vs Symbol X Carrier on page 22 See Power vs Carrier upstream only on page 22 See Power vs Symbol X Carrier on page 23 See Power Spectrum on page 24 See Spectrum Flatness on page 26 TRACe lt n gt DATA X lt TraceNumber gt This command queries the horizontal trace data for each sweep point in the specified window for example the frequency in frequency domain or the time in time domain measurements Query parameters lt TraceNumber gt Trace number Example TRAC3 X TRACE1 Returns the x values for trace 1 in window 3 Usage Query only TRACe IQ DATA MEMory lt OffsetSamp gt lt NumSamples gt Returns all the trace data in the capture buffer The result values are scaled Volts The command returns a comma separated list of the measured voltage values in floating point format Comma Separated Values CSV The number of values returned is 2 the number of complex samples the first half being the values the second half the Q values Retrieving Results Parameters lt OffsetSamp gt Offset of the values to be read related to the start of the capture buffer Range 0 to lt NumSamples gt 1 lt NumSamples gt Number of measurement values to be read Range 1 to lt NumSamples gt lt OffsetSa gt 10 9 4 Measurem
301. operation See Modulation on page 63 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 I Q Measurement Modulation Accuracy CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt SUBCarrier SET lt Subcarrier gt lt Subcarrier gt Defines a comma separated list of discrete subcarriers to be configured identically in the Modulation Subcarrier Assignment table for the currently selected profile Use the CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt SELect command to select a pro file Suffix lt gt 1 200 index the Modulation Subcarrier Assignment table for the cur rently selected profile Parameters lt Subcarrier gt Subcarrier number Range 1 to 8191 Example CONF DS CHAN PCON2 SUBC SET 100 101 102 Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Subcarrier Set on page 64 CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt SUBCarrier STARt lt SubcarrierStart gt Defines the first subcarrier in a series of subcarriers to be configured identically in the Modulation Subcarrier Assignment table for the currently selected profile Use the CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt SELect command to select pro file Suffix lt i gt 1 200 index in the Modulation Subcarrier Assignment table for the cur rently selected profile Parameters lt SubcarrierStart gt Range 1 to 2K mode 2047 4K mode 4095 Must be lower than the parameter used by CONFigure D
302. or This setting is required to provide demodulated audio frequen cies at the output RST IF Example OUTP IF VID Selects the video signal for the IF VIDEO DEMOD output con nector Manual operation See IF Video Output on page 85 OUTPut IF IFFRequency Frequency This command defines the frequency for the IF output of the R amp S FSW The IF fre quency of the signal is converted accordingly This command is available in the time domain and if the IF VIDEO DEMOD output is configured for IF Parameters Frequency RST 50 0 MHz Manual operation See IF Wide Out Frequency on page 85 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy 10 5 3 Frontend Configuration 10 5 3 1 The following commands configure frequency amplitude and y axis scaling settings which represent the frontend of the measurement setup 6 25 DLL 193 e Amplitude Settings nid niin eden dere 194 Frequency SENSE FREQUSnc y 193 SENSE FREQUEN CENTERS TEP eite eraot TAEA aaa 193 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO wo cescessscecsesesesessevsceessevsnsestetsesnetsseneveceneeess 194 SENSe PREQuUency s aD race EYE HEP ea v Lau 194 SENSe FREQuency CENTer Frequency This command defines the center frequency Parameters Frequenc
303. ot available for upstream measurements User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 25 R amp S FSW K192 K193 Measurements and Result Display If more than one frame is evaluated that is Analyzing a single frame Specified Frame is not enabled a statistical evaluation of the specified Frame Statistic Count Number of Frames to Analyze or for all detected frames in the capture buffer is also performed In this case the minimum maximum and mean values are displayed as well as the defined limit if available For details on the evaluation basis see Basis of Statistical Evaluation on page 37 For details on individual entries see chapter 3 1 2 Signal Content Information on page 14 3 Signal Content Summary LDPC LDPC LDPC Modulation count Bit Err Pre Bit Err Post CW Err Post BER Pre Post BLER Post Pilots BPSK n a n a n a n a PLC Preamble BPSK 90 8 0 ave n a Sees 100 PLC Data 16 OAM 9 n a 1 006400 NCP All None Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SCS see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 216 Results FETCh SCSummary ALL on 246 FETCh FRAMe COUNt on page 238 FETCh FRAMe COUNt ALL on page 238 Spectrum Flatness This result display shows the relative power offset per carrier caused by the transmit channel for the currently Selected Frame as indicated in the Magnitude Capture dis play 2 Spectrum Flatness F 500 0 MHz 20 48 MHz Span 204 8 MHz The carri
304. ot patterns differ by the number of pilots in a minislot and by their arrangement within the minislot The different pilot patterns enable the CMTS to optimize its performance according to different transmission conditions The DOCSIS 3 1 specification 2 also specifies complementary pilots User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 a7 R amp S FSW K192 K193 Measurement Basics Complementary pilots are subcarriers that carry data but with a lower modulation order than other data subcarriers in the minislot Complementary pilots allow phase tracking along the time axis for frequency offset and phase noise correction and may be used by the CMTS upstream receiver to enhance signal processing such as improving the accuracy of center frequency offset tracking Minislot structure All data subcarriers in a minislot have the same QAM constellation All complementary data subcarriers in a minislot also have the same QAM constellation but lower in order than that of the data subcarriers in that minislot QAM constellations of data and com plementary pilots need not be the same for all minislots Minislots are defined by a fixed number K of symbols and a number Q of subcarri ers The number K of symbols per minislot is defined as a minimum of 6 and a maxi mum of 9 to 36 depending on the used bandwidth and FFT duration The number Q of subcarriers per minislot is defined as 8 for 2K mode and 16 for 4K mode Between minislots excluded subcarr
305. our remote control programs Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 1 09 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Parameters lt Source gt Example Manual operation IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector EXT2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input RFPower First intermediate frequency IFPower Second intermediate frequency TIME Time interval RST IMMediate TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal See Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 84 See Trigger Source on page 93 See Free Run on page 93 See External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 93 See Baseband Power on page 94 See Digital 1 0 on page 94 See IF Power on page 95 See RF Power on page 95 See Power on page 95 See Power Sensor on page 96 See Time on page 96 TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval Interval This command defines the repetition interval for the time trigger Parameters Interval Example Manual operation 2 0 ms to 5000 Range 2ms to 5000s RST 1 0s TRIG SOUR TIME Selects the time trigger input for triggering TRIG TIME RINT 50 The measurement starts every 50 s See Repetition Interval on page 96 Configuring the DOCS
306. ource is automatically switched to Free Run Remote command TRIG SOUR RFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 204 Power Trigger Source Trigger Source Settings This trigger source is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface or optional Analog Baseband Interface is used for input It is also not available for analysis band widths 2 160 MHz Triggers the measurement when the magnitude of the sampled data exceeds the trigger threshold User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 95 DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy The trigger bandwidth corresponds to the bandwidth setting for I Q data acquisition Remote command TRIG SOUR see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 204 Power Sensor Trigger Source Trigger Source Settings Uses an external power sensor as a trigger source This option is only available if a power sensor is connected and configured Note For R amp S power sensors the Gate Mode Lv is not supported The signal sent by these sensors merely reflects the instant the level is first exceeded rather than a time period However only time periods can be used for gating in level mode Thus the trigger impulse from the sensors is not long enough for a fully gated measurement the measurement cannot be completed Remote command TRIG SOUR PSE See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 204 Time Trigger Source Trigger Source Settings Triggers in a
307. oved command FETCh SCDetailed ALL FORMatted on page 242 Example This is the maximum length of a verbatim in an rcexample FETC SCD ALL Pilots 1 1 0 BPSK 36 5917472839 59 2369003296 21 21 21 9 91E37 1 9 91E37 1 9 91E37 1 9 91E37 1 9 91E37 PLC Preamble 1 1 1 NONE BPSK 17 1588058472 59 2369003296 21 21 1 9 91E37 1 9 91E37 1 9 91E37 1 9 91E37 1 9 91E37 PLC Data 1 1 2 NONE QAM16 8 87111473083 59 2369003296 21 21 21 9 91E37 1 9 91E37 10 1 21 9 91537 1 9 91E37 Codeword 0 symbol 0 NCP CRC 24 0 0 5 A 0AM16 0 00012632261 59 2369003296 12 1 1 9 91E37 e1 9 91E37 1 1 91 9 91537 1 9 91E37 Usage Query only FETCh SCDetailed ALL FORMatted This command returns the following detailed signal content values as a comma sepa rated list CW INDEX SYMBOL START gt lt OBJECT gt MODULATION MER POWER lt SUBCARRIERS gt lt LDPC_ITER gt lt BER_PRE gt lt BER PRE N BER POST BER POST N CWERR POST CWERR POST N RESERVED 1 RESERVED 2 RESERVED 3 RESERVED 4 E In the first rows the information is provided for the following objects in the specified order Downstream e PLC preamble e PLC data Pilots e Excluded subcarriers Upstream Pilots e Excluded subcarriers Then t
308. page 129 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 129 eres User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 265 R amp S FSW K192 K193 Remote Commands for DOCSIS 3 1 Measurements SSS SSE ees 10 10 3 2 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA sese 266 9 lt gt 200 lt gt 266 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt 1 gt lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm 1 origin of coordinate system 1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt 2 gt lt 2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 129 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all
309. parameter gt MINimum 3 1 2 Signal Content Information In addition to the modulation accuracy parameters that are calculated from the input signal detailed signal content information is available for analysis in the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application The Signal Content Detailed result display shows the serialized information from the list of NCPs and codewords downstream or minislot sets upstream contained in the input signal In the first rows the information is provided for the following objects in the specified order Downstream e PLC preamble e PLC data DOCSIS 3 11 Measurement Pilots e Excluded subcarriers Upstream Pilots e Excluded subcarriers Then the information for each symbol in the order of the logical subcarriers is provi ded with one row each for Downstream e NCPs e Codewords Upstream Minislot sets The Signal Content Summary result display shows the summarized information for the NCPs and codewords contained in the downstream input signal Table 3 3 DOCSIS 3 1 Signal Content Parameters Column Description CW Index Codeword index 0 1535 Not available for PLC pilots and excluded subcarriers Symbol Start OFDM symbol 0 127 Not available for PLC pilots and excluded subcarriers Object Information type Invalid data 1 Pilots 0 PLC Preamble 1 PLC Data 2 Excluded subcarrier 3 NCP CW 4 NCP 24 5 NCP Null 6 C
310. pied Bandwidth measurement determines the bandwidth that the signal occu pies The occupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth in which in default settings 99 of the total signal power is to be found The percentage of the signal power to be included in the bandwidth measurement can be changed For further details about the Occupied Bandwidth measurements refer to Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth in the R amp S FSW User Manual To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement Reference level and reference level offset RBW VBW e Sweep time Span 5 4 2 CCDF Access Overview gt Select Measurement gt CCDF or MEAS gt Select Measurement gt CCDF The CCDF measurement determines the distribution of the signal amplitudes comple mentary cumulative distribution function The CCDF and the Crest factor are dis played For the purposes of this measurement a signal section of user definable length is recorded continuously in zero span and the distribution of the signal ampli tudes is evaluated The measurement is useful to determine errors of linear amplifiers The crest factor is defined as the ratio of the peak power and the mean power The Result Summary dis plays the number of included samples the mean and peak power and the crest factor The CCDF measurement is performed as in the Spectrum application with t
311. plays essen 222 e Gonfiguimg Scaling arid UMS socie tree cerebri 225 General Window Commands The following commands are required to configure general window layout independent of the application e 215 DISPlayEWINDBoewsne SIZE crit tetto aeui eoe eve e e eee 215 DISPlay FORMat Format This command determines which tab is displayed Parameters Format SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active chan nels SINGIe Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SING Example DISP FORM SPL DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL command see LAYout SPLitter on page 219 10 7 2 Configuring the Result Display Parameters lt Size gt LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size If more than one measurement window was displayed originally these are visible again RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 LARG Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the scre
312. pped to QAM constellation points randomization undone undecoded Input Bits LDPC Undecoded hard decisions of the log likelihood ratio values seen by the LDPC decoder whole FEC codeword 16200 bits Output Bits LDPC Decoded LDPC decoder output whole FEC codeword 16200 bits Remote command SENSe DEMod DECode BITStream on page 210 5 3 9 Evaluation Range Access MEAS CONFIG gt Evaluation Range The evaluation range defines which objects the result evaluation is based on As a rule graphical result displays are always based on a single frame while the numeric results may include statistical evaluation over several frames For more information see Basis of Statistical Evaluation on page 37 DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Analyze Specified Frame Frame Statistics Frame Statistic Count Number of Frames to Analyze Exclude Subcarriers from MER Calculation Subcarrier Set User Defined Evaluation range settings are only available when no measurement is being per formed that is after a single sweep has finished or when a continuous sweep has been interrupted Analyzing a single frame Specified Frame 22 0 0 1 4120 0 11 1 0204 440 106 Selected Frae enirere renter rere reer peer er errr 107 Frame Statistic Count Number of Frames to 107 Excluding Subcarriers from
313. procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a key board Notes on Screenshots When describing the functions of the product we use sample screenshots These screenshots are meant to illustrate as much as possible of the provided functions and possible interdependencies between parameters The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product that is with all options instal led Thus some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your par ticular product configuration 2 Welcome to the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 applications The R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 applications R amp S FSW K192 K193 are firmware appli cations that add functionality to the R amp S FSW to perform measurements according to the DOCSIS 3 1 standard R amp S FSW K192 performs measurements for DOCSIS 3 1 downstream signals R amp S FSW K193 performs measurements for DOCSIS 3 1 upstream signals Bandwidth extension option required Both R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 applications require a bandwidth extension option for 320 MHz The R amp S FSW K193 option for DOCSIS 3 1 upstream signals requires the new bandwidth extension hardware R amp S FSW B320 11325 4867 04 The R amp S FSW K192 option for DOCSIS 3 1 downstream signals requires either the option R amp S FSW B320 1313 7172 02 or the new bandwidth extension hardwa
314. provided in a selection list For each of the four available power sensor indexes Power Sensor 1 Power Sensor 4 which correspond to the tabs in the configura tion dialog one of the detected serial numbers can be assigned The physical sensor is thus assigned to the configuration setting for the selected power sensor index By default serial numbers not yet assigned are automatically assigned to the next free power sensor index for which Auto Assignment is selected DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Alternatively you can assign the sensors manually by deactivating the Auto option and selecting a serial number from the list Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt STATe on page 187 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt DEFine on page 181 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt CONFigure AUTO STATe on page 181 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNt on page 181 Zeroing Power Sensor Starts zeroing of the power sensor Remote command CALibration PMETer lt p gt ZERO AUTO ONCE on page 183 Frequency Manual Defines the frequency of the signal to be measured The power sensor has a memory with frequency dependent correction factors This allows extreme accuracy for signals of a known frequency Remote command SENSe lt gt FREQuency on page 185 Frequency Coupling Selects the coupling option The frequency can be coupled automatically to the center frequ
315. r ie E PEN ERR 204 TRIGger sEQUuericeLHEVel RE ROWS exeo epi attori Re 204 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernalsport 5 aote nth nr nennen 203 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe TRIGger SEQuence SOURce TRIGger SEQuerice IME RINTEN rennen ente n nes 205 UNIT BITSUCAM E etn ertet cie hia eri asia 231 UNIT REDE IM A I IET 231 UNITA PME Terk pA POWE nannan aaa rn ee e E ene ec X EXE Ke rev Een paa 188 gt 188 Index A Aborting 101 AC DC 75 Activating DOCSIS 3 1 measurements remote 145 Adjacent channels Filteritig OULD Amplitude COMIQUTATION e tonius Configuration remote iffe Analog Baseband Inp tsettinigs s nort or v 78 Analog Baseband B71 VQ MOJE m 78 Input type remote control 179 Analog Baseband Interface B71 Inp tsettiligS coe nter 78 Analysis Remote COMO accen thi 259 RF measurements 2 fuper 122 Applications Adopted para metel
316. r of the limits are fixed or not see Auto Fix Range one or both limits are defined by a hysteresis value range The hysteresis range is defined as a percentage of the currently displayed value range on the y axis Example The currently displayed value range on the y axis is 0 to 100 The upper limit is fixed by a maximum of 100 The lower hysteresis range is defined as 10 to 10 If the minimum value in the current measurement drops below 10 or exceeds 10 the y axis will be rescaled automatically for example to 10 100 or 10 100 respec tively Upper HIU If the maximum value in the current measurement exceeds the speci fied range the y axis is rescaled automatically DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Lower HIL If the minimum value in the current measurement exceeds the speci fied range the y axis is rescaled automatically Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis LOWer UPPer page 226 DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis LOWer LOWer on page 227 DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis UPPer LOWer on page 227 DISPlay WINDow lt N gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO HYSTeresis UPPer UPPer on page 227 Minimum Maximum Defines the minimum and maximum value to be displayed on the y axis of the speci fied evaluation diagram For automatic sc
317. rding to the PLC Start Index L and PLC Number of Subcarriers N on page 55 from the Signal Description settings Therefore the first row providing the PLC info is read only Below the table a modulation vs subcarrier diagram indicates which channels are defined for which function R amp S FSW K192 K193 Configuration tinuous Pilots Excluded Subcarrier Assi gnment IS 3 1 3 Subcarrier Set PLC 2051 Excluded Subcarriers 0 260 342 419 494 573 644 723 793 873 952 Continuous Pilots Excluded Subcarriers 1000 NY 3 User Defined Set Index Continuous line number in configuration table Remote command CONFigure DS CHANnel CPES lt i gt COUNt on page 159 Type Type of special subcarrier for upstream signals only excluded subcarriers are availa ble Physical link channel First line only default always available Cont Pilot Pilot that occurs at the same frequency location in every OFDM sym bol and which is used for frequency and phase synchronization Note As soon as an entry in the table is defined using the Type Continuous Pilots Auto Detection Continuous Pilots downstream only is automatically set to User Defined User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 56 DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Excluded Subcarrier that cannot be used because another type of service is Subcarrier using the subcarrier s frequency or a permanent ingressor is present on
318. re R amp S FSW B320 11325 4867 04 If the required options are not installed an error message is displayed and no mea surements can be performed with the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 applications The R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 applications feature Modulation accuracy measurements e Occupied bandwidth measurements Statistical measurements This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the application pro vides including remote control operation functions not discussed in this manual are the same as in the base unit and are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual The latest version is available for download at the http www2 rohde schwarz com product F SW html An application note discussing the fundamental technological advances of DOCSIS 3 1 and presenting measurement solutions from Rohde amp Schwarz is available from the Rohde amp Schwarz website http www rohde schwarz com appnote 7MH89 Installation You can find detailed installation instructions in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual or in the Release Notes Starting the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application 2 1 Starting the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application Both R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application options add a new application to the R amp S FSW To activate the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 applications 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel of the R amp S FSW A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications curren
319. remote tren tenerent 258 Measurement settings 123 EU 130 Traces 122 124 External tigger sd cc eU rer tesi 93 Level power sensor eee 84 Level remote Power sensor F Falling Slope Power Sensor 84 Files Format VO data eec ee ect tiere data binary XML Q parameter XML iita Filters Adjacent channels 198 High pass remote 2002 173 Higkispass RF itiput sssri eret 75 YIG remote haus tiec d eta 173 Format Data remote ect 253 263 264 Frames Analyzing individually eese 106 Evaluating remote cece cots eren 214 Selecting remote 2 213 SIaliSliCS 107 Statistics remote 212 213 Free gt 93 Frequency Config tlatiOti et tres 87 Configuration remote 193 Coupling power sensor 4 02 o 85 url eset athe 88 8 50 C 82 Frequency sweep measurements Configuring DOCSIS 3 1 Frontend Configuration remote 193 Parametar Sinia orein eeepc 44 FSW_K192_CALC MARK Y DOCSIS 3 1 Remote control eerte 139 Full scale level Analog Baseba
320. rmanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 264 6 2 Markers Access Overview gt Result Configuration gt Markers or MKR Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display R amp S FSW K192 K193 Analysis o Markers in 3 dimensional result displays Common markers are defined by their value on the x axis In 3 dimensional result dis plays where a parameter value is indicated by color for all carriers and symbols the marker position must be defined by its value on the x axis carrier and y axis symbol The third dimension is the parameter value MER or power In these result displays only a single normal marker is available 3 MER vs Symb X Carrier 1 Clrw Carrier Number Symbol Number r E yymbo Carrier Number e individual Marker Settings ben ke tene Bat eer d e sex 125 General Marker Settings ceci erkennen rene bnt nane 128 6 2 1 Individual Marker Settings Access Overview Result Configuration Markers or gt Marker Config In DOCSIS 3 1 evaluations up to 4 marker
321. rther describes the contents of the file DateTime Contains the date and time of the creation of the file Its type is xs dateTime see RsIqTar xsd Samples Contains the number of samples of the data For multi channel signals all chan nels have the same number of samples One sample can be e A complex number represented as a pair of and values e Acomplex number represented as a pair of magnitude and phase values Areal number represented as a single real value See also Format element Clock Contains the clock frequency in Hz i e the sample rate of the I Q data A signal gen erator typically outputs the data at a rate that equals the clock frequency If the data was captured with a signal analyzer the signal analyzer used the clock fre quency as the sample rate The attribute unit must be set to Hz Format Specifies how the binary data is saved in the data binary file see DataFilename element Every sample must be in the same format The format can be one of the following complex Complex number in cartesian format and values interleaved and Q are unitless real Real number unitless polar Complex number in polar format i e magnitude unitless and phase rad values interleaved Requires DataType float32 or f1oat64 DataType Specifies the binary format used for samples in the 1 data binary file see DataFilename element and chapter A 2 2 I Q Data Binary File on page
322. ry only UNIT BITStream Unit Determines whether the data is displayed as bits or bytes default in a Bitstream result display if activated see Bitstream downstream only on page 17 Parameters Unit BIT BYTE RST BYTE Example UNIT BITS BIT Manual operation See Bitstream downstream only on page 17 See Bitstream Format on page 114 UNIT CAXes Unit For result displays that evaluate a parameter per carrier e g MER vs Carrier this command defines whether the carrier number or the carrier frequency in Hz is dis played on the x axis Note however that this setting applies to ALL result displays based on carriers Parameters Unit CARR HZ CARR The carrier number is displayed on the x axis of all carrier based result displays HZ The carrier frequency in Hz is displayed on the x axis of all car rier based result displays RST HZ Example UNIT CAX CARR Manual operation See Carrier Axes Unit on page 113 Starting a Measurement 10 8 Starting a Measurement When a DOCSIS 3 1 measurement channel is activated on the R amp S FSW a DOCSIS 3 1 I Q measurement Modulation Accuracy see chapter 3 1 DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement 13 is started immediately However you can stop and start a new measurement any time Furthermore you can perform a sequence of measurements using the Sequencer see chapter 5 1 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function on p
323. s always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is provided IF and Video Signal Output The measured IF signal or displayed video signal i e the filtered and detected IF sig nal can be provided at the IF VIDEO DEMOD or IF OUT 2 GHZ output connector The video output is a signal of 1 V It can be used for example to control demodula ted audio frequencies The IF output is a signal of the measured level at a specified frequency The IF OUT 2 GHZ output is a signal with a bandwidth of 2 GHz at the frequency 2 GHz This output is only available if the IF OUT 2 GHZ output connector is installed see Prerequisites below If the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is installed and active this is the only setting available for IF output Restrictions Note the following restrictions for IF output e IF and video output is only available the time domain zero span e For I Q data only IF output is available F output is not available if any of the following conditions apply The optional Digital Baseband Interface is active for input or output operating mode is active R amp S FSW K192 K193 Measurement Basics O a ee eee eee A wideband extension is used hardware options R amp S FSW B160
324. s always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 216 for a list of availa ble window types Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix in the active measurement channel Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtifyl WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index Example LAY WIND2 IDEN Queries the name of the result display in window 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow n REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix n from the display in the active measurement channel Configuring the Result Display The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command Example LAY WIND2 REM Removes the result display in window 2 Usage Event LAYout
325. s can be activated in each diagram at any time In 3 dimensional result displays only a single normal marker is available see Mark ers in 3 dimensional result displays on page 125 User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 125 i Level 5 apture lime 5 ms e BETA 150424 Markers Marker Settings Ref Marker Selected State X value Y value Type e CNN lorn All Marker Off 4 Power vs Symb X Carrier Selected 126 Marker State sa 126 PAW AUG 333 126 QN 127 MEI M 127 Reference MAKER aet 127 Assigning this Marker to a uci e oder roh ated PU IO RAS 127 O 127 Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix lt m gt in remote commands Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe page 261 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on 260 X value Defines the position of the marker on the x axis frequency carrier symbol depending on evaluation Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on 260 CALCu
326. sco Mode remote iiie Exe ae Det ene scie EU Softkey T kii Settings iae vae cet irit a Peserers t cid 49 Signal capturing Remote COMOL 198 Signal Content Detailed Result display 3 5 a 25 Signal Content Summary Result display 25 Signal description COMMUNI EET Remote control is ec P Signal Processing Downsteari hrec ri 31 37 Signal source cec 174 Single Sequencer fep 47 Single sweep SONKEY IEEE E 101 SiBgl amp ZOODITi i ri 128 Slope POWESRSENSOF tigget xis tiene ete ocn TII Ger uos coe ta bon edens Trigger Power sensor Softkeys Amplitude CONG 88 BB Power Continue Single Sweep eene 101 Continuous Sequencer Continuous Sweep 101 Data acquisition Digital Display Config Export 2 Exteirial tette Eee terree citer Free RUM e deer tas e Frequency Config 87 Power 2 95 IE POWGT RT 95 Input Source CONTIG temen 74 IQ Export 25 2 s PONE Market Config renes 124 Marker to ThaGe
327. selected entry Remove Subcarrier Set Removes the currently selected entry Insert Inserts a new line in the table below the currently selected row Delete Deletes the currently selected row Delete Deletes all lines in the table except for the default PLC configuration Auto Detection Continuous Pilots downstream only Defines how continuous pilots are detected in the symbols If Auto from Signal is selected continuous pilots are detected automatically during demodulation If User Defined is selected the pilots must be configured manually in the Continuous Pilots and Excluded Subcarrier Assignment table using the Type Continuous Pilots Note As soon as an entry in the Continuous Pilots and Excluded Subcarrier Assign ment table is defined or changed to the Type Continuous Pilots this setting is auto matically set to User Defined Remote command SENSe DEMod CPILots AUTO on page 209 Save Saves the changes to the table and closes the dialog box Cancel Closes the dialog box without saving the changes Codeword Frame Configuration Access Overview gt Signal Description gt Codeword Configuration gt Frame Con figuration or MEAS CONFIG gt Signal Description gt Codeword Configuration gt Frame Con figuration The useful data that is to be transmitted to the same group of cable modems is sum marized into codewords Codewords are sequentially assigned to fr
328. selected frame is marked by a blue bar in the capture buffer display see Magnitude Capture on page 19 Parameters lt Value gt integer Range 0 to max no frames in capture buffer RST 0 Example SENS FRAM SEL STAT SENS FRAM SEL 2 Configuring Frequency Sweep Measurements on DOCSIS 3 1 Signals Manual operation See Bitstream downstream only on page 17 See Constellation on page 18 See Group Delay on page 19 See MER vs Carrier on page 20 See MER vs Symbol on page 21 See MER vs Symbol X Carrier on page 22 See Power vs Carrier upstream only on page 22 See Power vs Symbol X Carrier on page 23 See Power Spectrum on page 24 See Signal Content Detailed on page 25 See Spectrum Flatness on page 26 See Selected Frame on page 107 SENSe FRAMe SELect STATe State If enabled only the frame specified by the SENSe FRAMe SELect command is evaluated Statistic evaluation for numeric results is not performed as only one result is available for each frame parameter If disabled all detected frames in the current capture buffer are evaluated for numeric results For graphical results the first frame to be detected in the capture buffer frame 0 is automatically selected for evaluation Parameters State OFF RST OFF Example SENS FRAM SEL STAT ON SENS FRAM SEL 1 Manual operation See Analyzing a single frame Specified Frame o
329. signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 the in phase component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF 1 Q The quadrature component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 the quadrature component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF Q RST IQ INP IQ TYPE Q See 1 Mode on page 78 CALibration AIQ HATiming STATe State Activates a mode with enhanced timing accuracy between analog baseband RF and external trigger signals Parameters State Example Manual operation ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 The high accuracy timing function is switched on The cable for high accuracy timing must be connected to trigger ports 1 and 2 OFF 0 The high accuracy timing function is switched off RST OFF CAL AIQ HAT STAT See High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF on page 79 Working with Power Sensors The following commands describe how to work with power sensors Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy e Configuring Power ttd dete rente zd ae S 181 e Configuring Power Sensor Measurements essen 182 e Triggering with Power 5 189 Configuring Power Sensors SYSTem COMMunicate RDEV
330. sition of a marker on the y axis symbol for 3 dimen sional result displays MER vs Symbol X Carrier Power vs Symbol X Carrier To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 233 Parameters Symbol Symbol at which the marker is placed Example CALC MARK2 Y 20 Manual operation See Y value on page 127 CALCulate n MARKer m Z This command queries the value of a marker in 3 dimensional result displays MER vs Symbol X Carrier Power vs Symbol X Carrier To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 233 Return values Result Result at the marker position symbol carrier For MER vs Symbol X Carrier modulation error ratio in dB or 76 For Power vs Symbol X Carrier power value in dBm Example CALC MARK2 2Z Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only 10 10 2 Analysis DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off Parameters lt DisplayMode gt ON Turns the marker table on OFF Turns the marker table off RST AUTO Example DISP MTAB ON Activates
331. specified repetition interval Remote command TRIG SOUR TIME see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 204 Trigger Level Trigger Source Settings Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port page 203 Repetition Interval Trigger Source Settings Defines the repetition interval for a time trigger The shortest interval is 2 ms The repetition interval should be set to the exact pulse period burst length frame length or other repetitive signal characteristic Remote command TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval on page 205 Drop Out Time Trigger Source Settings Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 202 Trigger Offset Trigger Source Settings Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy offset gt 0 Start of the measurement is delayed offset lt 0 Measurement starts earlier pre trigger Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME 202 Hysteresis Trigger Source Settings Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger eve
332. strates how to store complex cartesian data in float32 format using MATLAB Save vector of complex cartesian I Q data i e N 100 iq randn 1 N 1j randn 1 N fid fopen xyz complex float32 w for k 1 length iq fwrite fid single real iq k float32 fwrite fid single imag iq k float32 end fclose fid List of Remote Commands Docsis 3 1 SENSe CHANnel ES Timatllon cierre eret 208 SENSE IDEMO C PILOS AUTO Brecht Ced p ex ud exe DURER 209 SENSe DEMod DEGode BITStreatm union 210 SENSe DEMod DECode CODGWOrFdS 2 terrier herr Eri ra deren 210 SENSe DEMod NGP AUTO coco kd rho teret oo tine ceci TRU do 211 SENSe FRAMe COUNt 5 5 5 ai b nee hl P ere d Hae Fue e erre e ud 213 SENSE FRAME SELEC wad ces es d oss oe 213 SENSe FRAMS SEL6Cct S TAT6 iir tn tr tr Ere ioa OO E Ra a ee ERN EXE 214 SENS FREQu ency CENTOr Cr tede er anette ce t DAR eet ra etr dde ee eee 193 ISENS J FREQUENCY CENTeESTEB is triti t e ci esse oca va beca ee Hen ORC 193 SENSe FREQuency GENTer STEP AUE TO ica tnter entr
333. stream downstream only on page 17 Parameters lt Mode gt IBDPdata Info Bits Decoded Payload Data Only the bits containing the actual information the payload bits are decoded and displayed RBITs Raw Bits Bits mapped to QAM constellation points undecoded RBD Raw Bits Descrambled Bits mapped to QAM constellation points randomization undone undecoded IBLDpc Input Bits LDPC Undecoded hard decisions of the log likelihood ratio values seen by the LDPC decoder whole FEC codeword 16200 bits OBLDpc Output Bits LDPC Decoded LDPC decoder output whole FEC codeword 16200 bits RST IBDP Example DEM DEC BITS IBLD Manual operation See Bitstream on page 105 SENSe DEMod DECode CODewords lt State gt This command determines whether codewords are decoded or not Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Codewords on page 104 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 1 09 Measurement Modulation Accuracy SENSe DEMod NCP AUTO lt FrameConfig gt This command determines how frames are configured Parameters lt FrameConfig gt SIGNAL USER SIGNAL Frames NCP content are detected in the signal automatically during demodulation USER Frames must be configured manually see chapter 10 5 1 6 Codeword Frame Configuration on page 169 Exampl
334. surements were captured for statistical evalu ation see Frame Statistic Count Number of Frames to Analyze on page 107 When you select a new frame the result displays are updated to show the results for the new evaluation range The selected frame is marked by a blue bar in the capture buffer display see Magnitude Capture on page 19 Remote command SENSe FRAMe SELect on page 213 Frame Statistic Count Number of Frames to Analyze Measurements are performed continuously until the required number of frames are available The number of captured and required frames in the current measurement are indicated as Analyzed Frames in the channel bar The number in parenthesis indicates the number of frames detected in the current capture buffer See Channel bar information on page 11 If the frame statistic count is enabled and single frame evaluation is disabled see Analyzing a single frame Specified Frame the specified number of frames is taken into consideration for the statistical evaluation in numeric results For graphical results even if frames from multiple measurements were captured for statistical evaluation only frames in the current capture buffer can be analyzed and displayed individually If disabled all detected frames in the current capture buffer are evaluated for statistics Note that in this case the number of frames contributing to the current results may vary extremely Remote command S
335. t These settings are only available if the Digital Baseband Interface option is installed on the R amp S FSW They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box input Input Source Power Sensor Frequency 1986100 101165 Digital IQ OUT 10 MHz Full Scale Level 10 dBm For more information see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and Input User Manual Digtal VO aput SIAE ON 77 DWE 77 Full Seale 6 UEM 77 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level esee 77 Cohnected DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Digital I Q Input State Enables or disable the use of the Digital IQ input source for measurements Digital IQ is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Remote command INPut SELect on page 174 Input Sample Rate Defines the sample rate of the digital I Q signal source This sample rate must corre spond with the sample rate provided by the connected device e g a generator If Auto is selected the sample rate is adjusted automatically by the connected device The allowed range is from 100 Hz to 10 GHz Remote command INPut DIQ SRATe on page 177 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO on page 178 Full Scale Level The Full Scale Level defines the level and unit that shou
336. t integer Range 1 to 200 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Example CONF DS CHAN FCON2 COUN Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Usage Query only Manual operation See Codeword Index on page 59 CONFigure DS CHANnel FCONfig lt i gt PROFile lt ProfileType gt Assigns one of the active profiles defined in the Profile List on page 62 to the selected codeword To determine whether a profile is active or not use the CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig i STATe query Suffix lt gt 1 1536 codeword index in the Codeword Frame Configuration table Parameters lt ProfileType gt A B C DJE FIG H I J K L M N O P NONE Example CONF DS CHAN FCON2 PROF A Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Profile on page 59 CONFigure DS CHANnel FCONfig lt i gt SUBCarrier COUNt lt NoSubcarriers gt Defines the number of subcarriers to which the selected codeword is assigned Suffix lt j gt 1 1536 codeword index in the Codeword Frame Configuration table Parameters lt NoSubcarriers gt Range 1 to 3745 4k 7537 8k Example CONF DS CHAN FCON2 SUBC COUN 200 Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation
337. t be longer than the Roll off period AUTO The length is determined automatically by the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application and indicated in the dialog box after the next measure ment 192 Samples Useful symbol period starts after 192 samples 0 9375us 0 9375ys 256 Samples Useful symbol period starts after 256 samples or 1 25us 1 25ys 512 Samples Useful symbol period starts after 512 samples or 2 55 2 5ys 768 Samples Useful symbol period starts after 768 samples or 3 75 s 3 7 5ys DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy 1024 Sam Useful symbol period starts after 1024 samples or 5 0 ples 5 0us Remote command CONFigure CHANnel CP on page 151 Roll off Defines the roll off period for the Tukey raised cosine window which is applied at the beginning and end of an OFDM symbol The roll off period defines the steepness of the filter The required period depends on the current transmission conditions The roll off period can be between 0 us and 1 25 us for the downstream Note The roll off period is integrated in the Cyclic Prefix CP and must be shorter than the Cyclic Prefix CP Auto Max The maximum possible roll off period is used automatically Roll Off 0 Samples No samples in the roll off period for no transmit windowing 0 0 us 64 Samples The roll off period contains 64 samples and lasts 0 3125 0 3125 us 128 Samples roll off period contains 128 samples and las
338. t mean power level Probability data is returned up to the power level that contains at least one sample It is highly unlikely that the full 201 data values will ever be returned Each probability value is returned as a floating point number with a value between 0 and 1 The syntax of the result is thus CCDF 0 CCDF 1 10 CCDF 2 10 CCDF N 1 10 Importing and Exporting Data and Results The data to be evaluated in the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application can not only be measured by the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application itself it can also be imported to the application provided it has the correct format Furthermore the evaluated data from the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application can be exported for further analysis external applications For details on importing and exporting I Q data see the R amp S FSW User Manual MMEM EOADIQISTA TQ ct tct ttd deter das cepa eerie ee uua qux ce decere tds 258 MMEMory S TOReshesd OS LAT ertet e PERRA S EX RE Rn ER CDRI MRNA SS 258 MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command restores data from a file Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the source file Example Loads IQ data from the specified file Usage Setting only MMEMory STORe lt n gt lQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command writes the captured data to a file The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant The file extens
339. t on page 186 Duty Cycle Sets the duty cycle to a percent value for the correction of pulse modulated signals and activates the duty cycle correction With the correction activated the sensor calculates the signal pulse power from this value and the mean power Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle STATe on page 184 SENSe PHETer p DCYCle VALue on page 185 5 3 3 3 DOCSIS 3 111 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Using the power sensor as an external trigger If activated the power sensor creates a trigger signal when a power higher than the defined External Trigger Level is measured This trigger signal can be used as an external power trigger by the R amp S FSW This setting is only available in conjunction with a compatible power sensor Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger STATe on page 191 TRIG SOUR PSE see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 204 External Trigger Level Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the trigger level for the power sensor trigger For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger LEVel page 190 Hysteresis Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Setting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level
340. t port gt LEVel on page 206 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection page 206 DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 207 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 206 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger cport PULSe LENGth on page 207 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is select
341. tab The number of channels that can be configured at the same time depends on the avail able memory on the instrument Only one measurement can be performed on the R amp S FSW at any time If one mea surement is running and you start another or switch to another channel the first mea 5 2 Display Configuration surement is stopped In order to perform the different measurements you configured in multiple channels you must switch from one tab to another However you can enable a Sequencer function that automatically calls up each activa ted measurement channel in turn This means the measurements configured in the channels are performed one after the other in the order of the tabs The currently active measurement is indicated by a amp symbol the tab label The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the corresponding tab as well as the Multi View as the measurements are performed Sequencer operation is independent of the currently displayed tab for example you can analyze the OBW measurement while the modulation accuracy measurement is being performed by the Sequencer For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FSW User Manual The Sequencer functions are only available in the MultiView tab Seg encer Slates needed rt ise edad ee 47 Sequencer Mode nice tete ore beca ep E e a n 47 Sequencer State Activates or deactivates the
342. table Parameters lt SymbolStart gt integer Range 0 to 127 Example CONF DS CHAN FCON2 SYMB STAR 1 Manual operation See First Symbol on page 60 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy 10 5 2 Configuring the Data Input and Output 172 Configuring Digital Q Input and Oultptut coe tei er tns 175 e Configuring Input via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface 178 e Working with Power nennen nennen nenne 180 e Configuring the c ctc nae te e ae nte ne Da un 191 10 5 2 1 RF Input INPUtATTen ation PRO Tection 22 Donne brc eaae co nda e 172 NPU GOURIN 172 172 INPutFIETerHPASSESTATe rro nen Rope Php 173 INPut FIE Ter VIGIS TAT reato dee eene 173 INPURIM Peda MEO iier Pot Eo uito coo e redd ed eco 174 eet otro 174 INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet This command resets the attenuator and reconnects the RF input with the input mixer after an overload condition occured and the protection mechanism intervened The error status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES
343. tarts after 256 samples or 1 25us 512 Useful symbol period starts after 512 samples or 2 5us 5768 Useful symbol period starts after 768 samples or 3 75us 1024 Useful symbol period starts after 1024 samples or 5 0us RST AUTO Example CONF CHAN CP 5192 Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Mode downstream Manual operation See Cyclic Prefix CP on page 53 CONFigure CHANnel NFFT lt NFFTsubcarriers gt Defines the length of the FFT duration which corresponds to the number of phsyical subcarriers Parameters lt NFFTsubcarriers gt FFT2K FFTAK FFT8K FFT2K Upstream only 2048 subcarriers at 50 kHz spacing FFT length 2048 sam ples FFT4K Downstream 4096 subcarriers at 50 kHz spacing FFT length 4096 samples Upstream 4096 subcarriers at 25 kHz spacing FFT length 4096 samples FFT8K Downstream only 8192 subcarriers at 25 kHz spacing FFT length 2048 samples RST FFT4K Example CONF CHAN NFFT FFT8K Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Example For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy on page 271 Manual operation See Nec FFT length on page 53 See Ner FFT length on page 67 CONFigure CHANnel ROFF lt RollOff gt downstream Defines the roll off period for the Tukey raised cosine window which is applied at the beginning and
344. te NEW 145 INS Tr melb GREaSteBEPI dO oit er 146 INSTiumentDELelte 146 B ed Ir PEE 147 INS Tr mebb RENSme oer eek ve pedo dose eaae eue eei exon eiue eue utes ev EY eed de 148 MS Trump Endet ey Ee ee exe XR RE IEEE munde xe esa pa 148 5 149 INSTrument CREate DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected measurement channel i e creates a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measurement set tings The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel extended by a consecutive number e g IQAnalyzer gt IQAnalyzer2 The channel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST SEL command Example INST SEL IQAnalyzer INST CRE DUPL Duplicates the channel named IQAnalyzer and creates a new measurement channel named IQAnalyzer2 Usage Event INSTrument CREate NEW lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command adds an additional measurement channel Activating DOCSIS 3 1 Measurements The number of measurement channels you can configure at the same time depends on available memory Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types s
345. te lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative STATe lt State gt This command turns relative power sensor measurements on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC PMET2 REL STAT Activates the relative display of the measured value for power sensor 2 FETCh PMETer lt p gt This command queries the results of power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Return values lt Level gt Power level that has been measured by a power sensor The unit is either dBm absolute measurements or dB relative measurements Usage Query only READ PMETer lt p gt This command initiates a power sensor measurement and queries the results Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Usage Query only SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle STATe lt State gt This command turns the duty cycle correction on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET2 DCYC STAT ON Manual operation See Duty Cycle on page 83 SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle VALue lt Percentage gt This command defines the duty cycle for the correction of pulse signals The power sensor uses the duty cycle in combination with the mean power to calculate the power of the pulse Suffix
346. te lt n gt SEQuencer MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the way the R amp S FSW application performs measurements sequentially Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 236 A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using OPC or WAI you must use SING1e Sequence mode For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Suffix n irrelevant Starting Measurement Parameters lt Mode gt SINGIe Each measurement is performed once regardless of the chan nel s sweep mode considering each channels sweep count until all measurements in all active channels have been per formed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode in the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequence is performed Then only those channels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Manual operation See Sequencer Mode on page 47 SYSTem
347. the frequency Remote command CONFigure DS CHANnel CPES n SUBCarrier TYPE on page 161 Subcarrier Range Start Increment Stop Defines a series of subcarriers to be configured identically The following restrictions apply e Start Stop Increment gt 1 For example to configure all 10 carriers between subcarriers 2044 and 2053 define e Start 2044 Increment 1 e Stop 2053 Remote command CONFigure DS CHANnel CPES i SUBCarrier STARt on page 160 CONFigure DS CHANnel CPES i SUBCarrier INCRement on page 159 CONFigure DS CHANnel CPES i SUBCarrier STOP on page 161 Subcarrier Set Specifies the discrete subcarrier numbers to be configured in the same set When you select the input field an edit dialog is displayed Enter the individual subcar rier numbers in the dialog selecting ENTER after each number To add further entry fields select Add Subcarrier Set i 159 163 166 293 298 299 302 350 353 356 372 439 441 442 445 535 537 548 549 646 650 665 666 750 763 771 774 822 832 841 860 Tip to configure a series of subcarriers identically use the Subcarrier Range Start Increment Stop settings Remote command CONFigure DS CHANnel CPES lt i gt SUBCarrier SET on page 160 DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Add Subcarrier Set Adds a new entry to the left of the currently
348. tion a link to the description is inserted 10 2 2 Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords The short form is emphasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as SENS FREQ CENT 10 2 3 Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple instances of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a mea surement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets n next to the keyword If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 Introduction 10 2 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compli ance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and you need to use the suffix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix of the missing keyword is assumed to be the value 1 Opti
349. tion Part STATus OPERation NTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel 10 11 2 6 Controlling the Positive Transition Part STATus OPERation PTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel 10 12 Programming Examples for DOCSIS 3 1 Measure ments The following programming examples demonstrate how to c
350. tly available on your R amp S FSW 2 Select the DOCSIS 3 1 item L7 Nj DOCSIS 3 1 The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the DOCSIS 3 1 down stream application The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be config ured in the DOCSIS 3 1 Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu see chapter 5 3 1 Configuration Over view on page 49 3 To perform a measurement on a DOCSIS 3 1 uplink signal select Signal Descrip tion gt Stream Direction Upstream 2 2 Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram during a DOCSIS 3 1 downlink measurement All different information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the following sections The basic screen elements are identical for DOCSIS 3 1 uplink measurements R amp S FSW K192 K193 Welcome to the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 applications MultiView 22 Spectrum DOCSIS 3 1 Ref Level 5 00 dBm Freq Hz Jfapture Time 6 ms 15dB Mode 4K Downstream D 150212 Frames 1 of 1 1 Je MM 2 2 2 Power Spectrum 2 e e 0 05 5 4 6 0 ms F 1 0 GHz 5 20 48 MHz Span 204 8 MHz 5 Signal Content Detailed CW Symbol LDPC LDPC LDPC Object Modulation Bit Err Pre Bit Err Post CW Err Post BER Pre BER Post BLER Post Index Start dBm Iterations n a n a Pilots PSK n a n a n a PLC Preamble B
351. to be stored for autoscaling Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y AUTO MEM DEPT 16 Manual operation See Memory Depth on page 117 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO MODE lt AutoMode gt This command determines which algorithm is used to determine whether the y axis requires automatic rescaling Parameters lt AutoMode gt Example Example Manual operation Configuring the Result Display HYSTeresis If the minimum and or maximum values of the current measure ment exceed a specific value range hysteresis interval the axis is rescaled The hysteresis interval is defined as a percentage of the currently displayed value range on the y axis An upper hys teresis interval is defined for the maximum value a lower hyste resis interval is defined for the minimum value MEMory If the minimum and or maximum values of the current measure ment exceed the minimum and or maximum of the lt x gt previous results the axis is rescaled The minimum and maximum value of each measurement are added to the memory After lt x gt measurements the oldest results in the memory are overwritten by each new measure ment The number of results in the memory to be considered is config urable see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO MEMory DEPTh RST HYSTeresis DISP WIND2 TRAC Y AUTO MODE MEM For a detailed example see chapter 10 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring M
352. to the R amp S FSW If no additional input options are installed only RF input is supported Parameters lt Source gt RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector RST RF Manual operation See Radio Frequency State on page 74 See Digital Input State on page 77 See Analog Baseband Input State on page 78 10 5 2 2 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Configuring Digital Input and Output Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S DiglConf automatically which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software are described the R amp S EX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp S Dig Conf Software Operating Manual Example 1 SOURCe EBOX RST SOURCe EBOX IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz DiglConf 02 05 436 Build 47 Example 2 SOURCe EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock Remote commands exclusive to digital I Q data input and output J 175 INPutDIQ RANGSEUPPet AU TO ues iier nb gor attt gu 176 INPut DIQ3TSANGe GOUPling 2 occi oa eo
353. trente ire n e 156 GONFigure CHANnekNFE T cerra tet terrore rtp E entera a a En 152 CONFIQUre CHANMELER OFF sie 153 nea tnr a rer eren dcr t ke ren epa eL nas 157 GONFigure DS CHANnel CPES i COUNI netter rrt erroe terea enun 159 CONFigure DS CHANnel CPES lt i gt SUBCarrier INCRement ess CONFigure DS CHANnel CPESsi SUBCartler SET erret neret nennen erae 05 5 lt gt 5 5 CONFigure DS CHANnel CPES i SUBCartier S TOP meseron nione ttt nter teret pen hi tke kao ae rara aga CONFigure DS CHANnel CPES n SUBCarrier TYPE CONFigure DS CHANnel FCONTIg lt i gt COUNU 169 CONFigure DS CHANnel FCONTIOSIF PROF ile ornari ce pesecadeatrapnenacemeaasvssanscendencantncastaniaunesreincencat e CONFigure DS CHANnel FCONfig lt i gt SUBCarrier COUNt ni CONFigure DS CHANnel FCONfig lt i gt SUBCarrier S 05 lt gt 5 CONFigure DS CHANnel FCONfig i SYMBOI STARt eese nennen nennen
354. ts Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Duration gt SHORt NORMal LONG RST NORMal Example PMET2 MTIM SHOR Sets a short measurement duration for measurements of station ary high power signals for the selected power sensor Manual operation See Meas on page 82 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage COUNt lt NumberReadings gt This command sets the number of power readings included in the averaging process of power sensor measurements Extended averaging yields more stable results for power sensor measurements espe cially for measurements on signals with a low power because it minimizes the effects of noise Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt NumberReadings gt An average count of 0 or 1 performs one power reading Range 0 to 256 Increment binary steps 1 2 4 8 Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Example PMET2 MTIM AVER ON Activates manual averaging PMET2 MTIM AVER COUN 8 Sets the number of readings to 8 Manual operation See Average Count Number of Readings on page 83 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage STATe lt State gt This command turns averaging for power sensor measurements on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET2 MTIM AVER ON Activates manual averaging Manual operation
355. ts 0 625 us 0 625 us 192 Samples roll off period contains 192 samples and lasts 0 9375 us 0 9375 us 256 Samples The roll off period contains 256 samples and lasts 1 25 1 25 us Remote command CONFigure CHANnel ROFF on page 153 Time Interleaving Depth Defines the maximum number of delay lines used for time interleaving The possible depth depends on the Nec FFT length The maximum depth for 4K mode is 32 for 8K mode it is 16 Remote command CONFigure DS CHANnel TIDepth on page 155 PLC Start Index L Defines the starting subcarrier index of the physical link channel PLC The PLC is located at the same position in each OFDM symbol and consists of several consecutive subcarriers The information in the PLC can be used by the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application to determine several of the signal description parameters automatically For more information see Continuous pilots excluded subcarriers PLC on page 33 If Auto is enabled the start index of the PLC is detected automatically After success ful detection this field indicates the PLC start index L DOCSIS 3 1 1 09 Measurement Modulation Accuracy If Auto is disabled the numeric value defined manually is used as the start index Note If you enter a value manually the Auto option is automatically disabled Remote command CONFigure DS CHANnel PLC INDex AUTO on page 154 CONFigure DS CHANnel PLC INDex on page 154 PLC Modulatio
356. tterns on page 38 Suffix lt i gt 1 200 index in the Profile Configuration Upstream table Parameters lt PilotPattern gt integer The pattern values depend on the selectedN FFT length Range 2K mode 1 to 7 4K mode 8 to 14 Manual operation See Minislot Pilot Pattern on page 72 Codeword Frame Configuration Useful commands for codeword frame configuration described elsewhere SENSe DEMod NCP AUTO page 211 Remote commands exclusive to codeword frame configuration CONFigure DS OHANngEEOCONfOSESSCOD NE is 169 0 lt gt 170 0 lt gt 0 170 0 lt gt 170 0 lt gt 5 171 5 lt gt 5 1 5 2 1 1 2404004006 171 CONFigure DS CHANnel FCONfig lt i gt COUNt This command returns the number of codewords rows in the Frame Configuration table Suffix lt gt irrelevant Return values lt Codewords g
357. ual 1175 6490 02 04 32 DOCSIS 3 1 Downstream Signal Processing Subcarriers and profiles For each of the subcarriers a different modulation may be used for transmission depending on channel conditions The assignment is configured in profiles For each set of modems with similar trans mission conditions a profile can then be assigned 2 QAM Profile B subcarrier lt gt QAM assignment subcarriers 0 Neer 1 Fig 4 2 Profile assignment of modulation to physical subcarriers In order to demodulate the data in the subcarriers the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 applica tion must determine the assignment of the modulation used by each subcarrier This is configured in the signal description Up to 16 different profiles can be configured and then assigned to each set of subcarriers sent to the same set of modems see Code words logical subcarriers frames and NCPs on page 34 Continuous pilots excluded subcarriers PLC Some subcarriers have a specific function and are used identically for all symbols Such fixed objects in the channel must be configured so that the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application can distinguish their contents from the useful data Subcarriers with a special function are configured in the signal description in a continuous pilots and excluded subcarrier assignment table Continuous pilots are located at the same position in each OFDM channel and are used to synchronize time and phase information between
358. uencies in zero span gt 13 6 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenua tion may provide a better signal to noise ratio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value For the R amp S FSW85 the mechanical attenuation can be varied only in 10 dB steps If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 197 INPut EATT AUTO on page 197 INPut EATT on page 196 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well The parameters Input Coupling and Impedance are identical to those in the Input settings See chapter 5 3 3 1 Input Source Settings on page 74 Preamplifier Input Settings If the optional Preamplifier hardware is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal You can us
359. ure display The Tracking Chan nel Estimation according to the user settings is applied The inphase results I are displayed on the x axis the quadrature phase Q results on the y axis Constellation ei Clrw The results can be restricted to the following e or all information types e or more modulation types e one or all symbols e or all subcarriers Multiple or all modulations can be selected simultaneously The points for each mod ulation are displayed by a different color using the following color map 1024 2048 16384 QAM QAM QAM Fig 3 3 Color map for constellation points for different modulations If a single modulation is selected the ideal constellation is also indicated in the display User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 18 R amp S FSW K192 K193 Measurements and Result Display ume ESS SS EEE EEE EEE _ EE Ears For details see Modulation on page 112 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CONS see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 216 SENSe MODulation SELect on page 223 SENSe OBJect SELect on page 223 SENSe SUBCarrier SELect on page 224 S j ENSe SYMBol SELect on page 225 SENSe FRAMe SELect on page 213 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 253 Group Delay Displays the time deviations of the signal versus carrier for the currently Selected Frame as indicated in the Magnitude Capture display 4 Group Delay ei Clrw
360. ure DS CHANnel PCONfig i COUNt on page 164 Modulation Defines the modulation used by the specified subcarriers Remote command CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig i SUBCarrier MODulation on page 166 Start Increment Stop Defines a series of subcarriers to be configured identically DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy The following restrictions apply e Start lt Stop e Increment gt 1 For example to configure all 10 carriers between subcarriers 2044 and 2053 define Start 2044 Increment 1 e Stop 2053 Remote command CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig i SUBCarrier STARt on 167 CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig i SUBCarrier INCRement on page 166 CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig i SUBCarrier STOP on page 167 Subcarrier Set Specifies the discrete subcarrier numbers to be configured identically When you select the input field an edit dialog is displayed Enter the individual subcar rier numbers in the dialog selecting ENTER after each number To add further entry fields select Add Subcarrier Set 163 166 299 302 356 372 442 445 548 549 665 666 841 860 to configure a series of subcarriers identically use the Subcarrier Range Start Increment Stop settings Remote command CONFigure DS CHANnel PCONfig lt i gt SUBCarrier SET on page 167 Add Subcarri
361. urements see the R amp S FSW User Manual The R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application provides the following frequency sweep mea surements Measurement Types and Results for Frequency Sweep Measure ments The R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application provides the following pre configured fre quency sweep measurements Occupied Bandwidth The Occupied Bandwidth OBW measurement determines the bandwidth in which default settings 99 96 of the total signal power is to be found The percentage of the signal power to be included in the bandwidth measurement can be changed The occupied bandwidth is indicated as the Occ BW function result in the marker table the frequency markers used to determine it are also displayed R amp S FSW K192 K193 Measurements and Result Display Ref Level 0 00 dBm RBW 3 2 SGL Att dB SWT 1 ms VBW 300kHz Mode Auto FFT 1 Occupied Bandwidth 1 CF 2 1 GHz 1001 pts 1 15 MHz Span 11 52 MHz 2 Marker Table Type Ref Tre Stimulus Response Function Function Result Mi 1 2 09 GHz 27 37 dBm T 1 2 GHz 32 78 cc Bw 4 166073926 MHz 1 2 102 1 1 12 n For details see chapter 5 4 1 Occupied Bandwidth on page 119 Remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL OBW see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 150 Querying results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBW see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 251 CCDF The CCDF comple
362. us QUEStionable SYNC reg isters In this case you must check the register of each channel to determine which channel caused the error By default querying the status of a register always returns the result for the currently selected channel However you can specify any other chan nel name as a query parameter Table 10 7 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable SYNC register Bit No Meaning 0 This bit is not used 1 SYNC FOUND No frames could be detected due to failed synchronization 2 BIT DSP ERROR Signal analysis failed due to a DSP error Status Registers Bit No Meaning 3 14 These bits are not used 15 This bit is always 0 10 11 2 Querying the Status Registers The following commands are required to query the status of the R amp S FSW and the R amp S FSW DOCSIS 3 1 application For details on the common R amp S FSW status registers refer to the description of remote control basics in the R amp S FSW User Manual chapter 10 11 1 The STATus QUEStionable SYNC Register on page 267 e General Status Register Commands sss 268 e Reading EYEN PA wise dies aie es 269 e Reading Out the CONDIUOR PSI eoe ree tee E EH ost tacite 269 e Controlling the ENABle 222 2 2 4 470 44 4 44 269 e Controlling the Negative Transition
363. use the number of frames to analyze is greater than the number of frames that can be captured in one buffer this command only returns the number of captured frames in the current capture buffer as opposed to FETCh FRAMe COUNt ALL Return values lt NoFrames gt integer value Example FETC FRAM COUN Usage Query only Manual operation See Result Summary on page 24 See Signal Content Summary on page 25 FETCh FRAMe COUNt ALL This command returns the number of analyzed frames for the entire measurement If multiple measurements are required because the number of frames to analyze is greater than the number of frames that can be captured in one buffer this command returns the number of analyzed frames in all measurements as opposed to FETCh FRAMe COUNt Return values lt NoFrames gt integer value Example FETC FRAM COUN ALL Usage Query only Manual operation See Result Summary on page 24 See Signal Content Summary on page 25 10 9 1 2 Error Parameter and Detailed Signal Content Results The following commands are required to retrieve individual results from the DOCSIS 3 1 I Q measurement on the captured data see chapter 3 1 1 Modula tion Accuracy Parameters on page 13 FETCH BIT SIAM ALL niet ecce e reed Ee 239 ates 241 PETCHISCDe TR
364. uto Set from PEGS amp RUD terere ca oe 118 Auto Set from PLC amp Run Performs an initial measurement in order to determine the required signal description settings automatically from the detected PLC before starting or continuing the actual Modulation Accuracy measurement This function is only available for downstream DOCSIS 3 1 signals The center frequency need not be defined beforehand however the PLC must be located inside the captured signal bandwidth Note that if auto detection is not possible the initial measurement will continue end lessly while trying to synchronize to the input signal In this case abort the detection process by selecting Single Sweep RUN SINGLE or Continuous Sweep RUN CONT or Auto Set from PLC amp Run again The following parameters are determined automatically e Center frequency e OFDM Spectrum Location 5 4 5 4 1 Frequency Sweep Measurements Neg FFT length Cyclic Prefix CP Roll off Time Interleaving Depth PLC Start Index L Continuous Pilots Excluded Subcarriers Profile A only Frequency Sweep Measurements Access MODE gt Docsis 3 1 Overview gt Select Measurement When you activate a measurement channel in DOCSIS 3 1 mode an measurement of the input signal is started automatically see chapter 3 Measurements and Result Display on page 13 However some parameters specified in the DOCSIS 3 1 stand ard require
365. ventions used in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters User Manual 1175 6490 02 04 140 Introduction Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values e Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command e Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available Default unit This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame ter Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual opera
366. x Roll off Number of symbols per frame 6 Select Excluded Subcarriers Configuration For each set of excluded subcarriers a Insert a new line b Assign the subcarriers either by entering a discrete set of numbers or by defin ing aseries with a fixed start stop and increment value Select OK and close the Excluded Subcarriers Configuration dialog box 7 Inthe Signal Description dialog box select the Profile Configuration tab 8 Configure the transmission profile that defines the modulation and pilot pattern to be used by which minislot s a Insert a new line b Select the number of minislots that use the same transmission configuration c Define the modulation and pilot pattern these minislots use for transmission d Select OK and close the Profile Configuration dialog box 9 Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s center frequency 10 Select the Signal Capture button to define how much and which data to capture from the input signal 11 Select the Estimation Tracking button to define which distortions will be compen sated for 12 Select the Evaluation Range softkey to configure a specific number of frames as the basis for statistical evaluation in the Result Summary Enable the Frame Statistic Count option and enter the Number of Frames to Analyze R amp S FSW K192 K193 to Perform Measurements the R amp S FSW
367. y The allowed range and fmax is specified the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Center frequency on page 53 See Center Frequency on page 80 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax iS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Configuring the DOCSIS 3 1 1 0 Measurement Modulation Accuracy Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 88 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the center frequency step size to the span Parameters lt State gt OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span SENSe FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a frequency offset
368. ys 1 Magnitude Capture default upper left 2 Power Spectrum default upper right 3 Result Summary default lower left 4 Constellation default lower right 5 Signal Content Detailed bottom 6 Bitstream bottom right LAY REPL 1 RFM LAY REPL 2 PSP LAY REPL 3 RSUM LAY REPL 4 CONS LAY ADD WIND 3 BEL SCD Result 5 LAY ADD WIND 5 RIGH BITS Result 6 Remove the individual MER data and MER Pilot results from the Result Summary table DISP WIND3 TABL ITEM MERD 0 DISP WIND3 TABL ITEM MERP 0 Query the display state of the combined pilot data MER result DISP WIND3 TABL ITEM MER Result 1 Configure the y axis scaling for the power spectrum Minimum Automatic scaling according to hyst interval from 20 to 410 Maximum fixed upper limit at 20dBm Display 10 divisions DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL DISP WINDZ TRAC Y SCAL DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL with multiples of 5E10 AUTO ON AUTO MODE HYST AUTO HYST LOW LOW 20 AUTO HYST LOW UPP 10 Programming Examples for DOCSIS 3 1 Measurements DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO FIX RANG UPP DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL MAX 20 DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL DIV 10 DISP WINDZ TRAC Y SCAL PDIV 5 0 Configure constellation for all subcarriers in symbol 1 SENS SUBC SEL ALL SENS SYMB SEL 1 Evaluation range settings Configure statistical evaluation over

R&S®FSW-K192/-K193 Docsis 3.1 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S&reg;FSW-K192/-K193 Docsis 3.1 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S®FSW-K192/-K193 Docsis 3.1 User Manual